KUKA System Technology                KUKA Roboter GmbHKUKA.SafeOperation 3.2  For KUKA System Software 8.3                Assembly and Operating Instructions     KUKA.SafeOp-  eration 3.2     Issued: 08.06.2016   Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     © Copyright 2016           KUKA Roboter GmbH           Zugspitzstraße 140           D-86165 Augsburg           Germany   This documentation or excerpts therefrom may not be reproduced or disclosed to third parties without           the express permission of KUKA Roboter GmbH.           Other functions not described in this documentation may be operable in the controller. The user has           no claims to these functions, however, in the case of a replacement or service work.           We have checked the content of this documentation for conformity with the hardware and software           described. Nevertheless, discrepancies cannot be precluded, for which reason we are not able to           guarantee total conformity. The information in this documentation is checked on a regular basis, how-           ever, and necessary corrections will be incorporated in the subsequent edition.           Subject to technical alterations without an effect on the function.           Translation of the original documentation           KIM-PS5-DOC     Publication:                Pub KST SafeOperation 3.2 (PDF) en           Book structure:             KST SafeOperation 3.2 V6.2           Version:                    KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7     2 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                                                            Contents   Contents 1       Introduction ..................................................................................................                           9 1.1     Target group ..............................................................................................................                   9 1.2     Industrial robot documentation ...................................................................................                            9 1.3     Representation of warnings and notes ......................................................................                                   9 1.4     Terms used ................................................................................................................              10  2       Product description .....................................................................................                                13 2.1     Overview of SafeOperation ........................................................................................                       13 2.2     Monitoring spaces ......................................................................................................                 14 2.2.1       Coordinate systems ..............................................................................................                    16 2.2.1.1          Special cases ...................................................................................................               18 2.2.2       Cell area ...............................................................................................................            19 2.2.3       Cartesian workspaces ..........................................................................................                      20 2.2.4       Cartesian protected spaces ..................................................................................                        21 2.2.5       Axis-specific workspaces ......................................................................................                      22 2.2.6       Axis-specific protected spaces .............................................................................                         23 2.2.7       Space-specific velocity .........................................................................................                    25 2.2.8       Reference stop .....................................................................................................                 25 2.3     Safe tools ...................................................................................................................           26 2.4     Velocity monitoring functions .....................................................................................                      27 2.5     Safe operational stop for axis groups ........................................................................                           28 2.6     Reference switch module ...........................................................................................                      28 2.7     Connecting cables .....................................................................................................                  29  3       Technical data ..............................................................................................                            31 3.1     Service life .................................................................................................................           31 3.2     Reference switch .......................................................................................................                 31 3.3     Connector pin assignment of reference cable X42-XS Ref .......................................                                           32 3.4     Circuit digram of reference switch XS Ref .................................................................                              33 3.5     Hole pattern for actuating plate ..................................................................................                      33  4       Safety ............................................................................................................                      35 4.1     General ......................................................................................................................           35 4.1.1       Liability ..................................................................................................................         35 4.1.2       Intended use of the industrial robot ......................................................................                          35 4.1.3       EC declaration of conformity and declaration of incorporation .............................                                          36 4.1.4       Terms used ...........................................................................................................               36 4.2     Personnel ...................................................................................................................            38 4.3     Workspace, safety zone and danger zone .................................................................                                 39 4.3.1       Determining stopping distances ............................................................................                          39 4.4     Triggers for stop reactions .........................................................................................                    40 4.5     Safety functions .........................................................................................................               40 4.5.1       Overview of the safety functions ...........................................................................                         40 4.5.2       Safety controller ....................................................................................................               41 4.5.3       Selecting the operating mode ...............................................................................                         41 4.5.4       “Operator safety” signal ........................................................................................                    42 4.5.5       EMERGENCY STOP device ................................................................................                               43    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     3 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   4.5.6        Logging off from the higher-level safety controller ................................................                       43           4.5.7        External EMERGENCY STOP device ..................................................................                          44           4.5.8        Enabling device ....................................................................................................       44           4.5.9        External enabling device ......................................................................................            45           4.5.10       External safe operational stop ..............................................................................              45           4.5.11       External safety stop 1 and external safety stop 2 .................................................                        45           4.5.12       Velocity monitoring in T1 ......................................................................................           45           4.6      Additional protective equipment ................................................................................               45           4.6.1        Jog mode ..............................................................................................................    45           4.6.2        Software limit switches .........................................................................................          46           4.6.3        Mechanical end stops ...........................................................................................           46           4.6.4        Mechanical axis range limitation (optional) ...........................................................                    46           4.6.5        Axis range monitoring (optional) ...........................................................................               46           4.6.6        Options for moving the manipulator without drive energy ....................................                               47           4.6.7        Labeling on the industrial robot ............................................................................              47           4.6.8        External safeguards .............................................................................................          47           4.7      Overview of operating modes and safety functions ...................................................                           48           4.8      Safety measures ........................................................................................................       48           4.8.1        General safety measures .....................................................................................              48           4.8.2        Transportation ......................................................................................................      50           4.8.3        Start-up and recommissioning ..............................................................................                50           4.8.3.1           Checking machine data and safety configuration ............................................                           51           4.8.3.2           Start-up mode ..................................................................................................      53           4.8.4        Manual mode ........................................................................................................       54           4.8.5        Simulation .............................................................................................................   54           4.8.6        Automatic mode ...................................................................................................         55           4.8.7        Maintenance and repair ........................................................................................            55           4.8.8        Decommissioning, storage and disposal ..............................................................                       56           4.8.9        Safety measures for “single point of control” ........................................................                     56           4.9      Applied norms and regulations ..................................................................................               57  5        Installation ....................................................................................................              61           5.1      System requirements .................................................................................................          61           5.2      Installing or updating SafeOperation .........................................................................                 61           5.3      Uninstalling SafeOperation ........................................................................................            62  6        Operation ......................................................................................................               63           6.1      User groups ...............................................................................................................    63           6.2      Opening the safety configuration ...............................................................................               63           6.3      Overview of buttons ...................................................................................................        63           6.4      Display functions .......................................................................................................      64           6.4.1        Displaying information about the safety configuration ..........................................                           64           6.4.2        Displaying the change log ....................................................................................             65           6.4.3        Displaying machine data ......................................................................................             65           6.5      Importing the safety configuration (XML import) ........................................................                       65           6.6      Exporting the safety configuration (XML export) .......................................................                        67           6.7      Safe robot retraction in case of space violation .........................................................                     68  7        Start-up and configuration ..........................................................................                          69    4 / 205                                                                                  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                                                           Contents   7.1      System safety instructions .........................................................................................                   69 7.2      Jogging the robot without a higher-level safety controller ..........................................                                  69 7.3      Start-up and configuration – overview .......................................................................                          70 7.4      Information about the safety configuration .................................................................                           71 7.4.1        Safe definition of Cartesian protected spaces ......................................................                               72 7.4.2        Unexpected protected space violation at space corners ......................................                                       74 7.5      Configuring safety monitoring functions .....................................................................                          75 7.5.1        Activating safe monitoring .....................................................................................                   75 7.5.2        Defining global parameters ...................................................................................                     75 7.5.3        Defining a cell area ...............................................................................................               77 7.5.4        Defining Cartesian monitoring spaces ..................................................................                            79 7.5.5        Defining axis-specific monitoring spaces ..............................................................                            84 7.5.6        Defining axis-specific velocity monitoring .............................................................                           87 7.5.6.1           Parameter Braking time .................................................................................                      90 7.5.7        Defining the safe operational stop for axis groups ................................................                                91 7.5.8        Defining safe tools ................................................................................................               93 7.5.9        Defining the reference position .............................................................................                      95 7.5.10       Saving the safety configuration .............................................................................                      97 7.6      Mastering test ............................................................................................................            98 7.6.1        Overview, mastering test ......................................................................................                    98 7.6.2        Programs for the mastering test ...........................................................................                        99 7.6.3        Variables for the mastering test ............................................................................                     100 7.6.4        Selecting a reference position ..............................................................................                     101 7.6.4.1           Installing the reference switch and actuating plate ..........................................                               101 7.6.4.2           Connecting a reference switch ........................................................................                       102 7.6.5        Teaching positions for the mastering test .............................................................                           103 7.6.6        Checking the reference position (actuation with tool) ...........................................                                 105 7.6.7        Performing a mastering test manually ..................................................................                           105 7.7      Brake test ...................................................................................................................        106 7.7.1        Overview of the brake test ....................................................................................                   106 7.7.2        Activating the brake test .......................................................................................                 107 7.7.3        Programs for the brake test ..................................................................................                    107 7.7.4        Configuring input and output signals for the brake test ........................................                                  108 7.7.4.1           Signal diagram of the brake test – examples ...................................................                              110 7.7.5        Teaching positions for the brake test ....................................................................                        111 7.7.6        Performing a manual brake test ............................................................................                       112 7.7.7        Checking that the brake test is functioning correctly ............................................                                113 7.8      Override reduction for velocity and workspace limits .................................................                                113 7.8.1        Override reduction with spline ..............................................................................                     115 7.8.2        Examples of override reduction with spline ..........................................................                             115 7.8.3        Variables for override reduction in $CUSTOM.DAT .............................................                                     117 7.9      Safety acceptance overview ......................................................................................                     117 7.10 Checking that the safety functions are functioning correctly ......................................                                       118 7.10.1       Testing Cartesian velocity limits ...........................................................................                     119 7.10.2       Testing axis-specific velocity limits .......................................................................                     119 7.10.3       Testing Cartesian monitoring spaces ...................................................................                           120 7.10.4       Testing axis-specific monitoring spaces ...............................................................                           121 7.10.5       Testing the safe operational stop for an axis group ..............................................                                122 7.11 Activating a new safety configuration .........................................................................                           122  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                5 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   7.12 Deactivating safe monitoring .....................................................................................              123  8        Interfaces to the higher-level controller ....................................................                              125           8.1      Safety functions via Ethernet safety interface ...........................................................                  125           8.1.1        SafeOperation via Ethernet safety interface (optional) .........................................                        129           8.1.2        Diagnostic signals via Ethernet interface ..............................................................                133           8.2      SafeOperation via interface X13 ................................................................................            136  9        Diagnosis ......................................................................................................            139           9.1      Displaying safe I/Os ...................................................................................................    139           9.2      Variables for diagnosis ..............................................................................................      139           9.3      Outputs for space monitoring ....................................................................................           140  10       Messages ......................................................................................................             141           10.1 Information about the messages ...............................................................................                  141           10.2 System messages from module: CrossMeld (KSS) ..................................................                                 141           10.2.1       KSS15016 ............................................................................................................   141           10.2.2       KSS15017 ............................................................................................................   141           10.2.3       KSS15018 ............................................................................................................   142           10.2.4       KSS15019 ............................................................................................................   143           10.2.5       KSS15033 ............................................................................................................   144           10.2.6       KSS15034 ............................................................................................................   144           10.2.7       KSS15035 ............................................................................................................   145           10.2.8       KSS15036 ............................................................................................................   145           10.2.9       KSS15037 ............................................................................................................   146           10.2.10 KSS15039 ............................................................................................................        146           10.2.11 KSS15040 ............................................................................................................        148           10.2.12 KSS15041 ............................................................................................................        149           10.2.13 KSS15042 ............................................................................................................        151           10.2.14 KSS15043 ............................................................................................................        152           10.2.15 KSS15044 ............................................................................................................        154           10.2.16 KSS15045 ............................................................................................................        155           10.2.17 KSS15046 ............................................................................................................        158           10.2.18 KSS15047 ............................................................................................................        159           10.2.19 KSS15048 ............................................................................................................        159           10.2.20 KSS15049 ............................................................................................................        159           10.2.21 KSS15050 ............................................................................................................        160           10.2.22 KSS15051 ............................................................................................................        160           10.2.23 KSS15052 ............................................................................................................        161           10.2.24 KSS15053 ............................................................................................................        163           10.2.25 KSS15054 ............................................................................................................        164           10.2.26 KSS15065 ............................................................................................................        165           10.2.27 KSS15066 ............................................................................................................        165           10.2.28 KSS15079 ............................................................................................................        168           10.2.29 KSS15081 ............................................................................................................        169           10.2.30 KSS15083 ............................................................................................................        170           10.2.31 KSS15127 ............................................................................................................        170  11       Appendix ......................................................................................................             171           11.1 Checklists ..................................................................................................................   171  6 / 205                                                                                 Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                                                    Contents   11.1.1       Precondition for safety acceptance based on the checklists ................................                                171 11.1.2       Checklist for robot and system .............................................................................               171 11.1.3       Checklist for safety functions ................................................................................            172 11.1.4       Checklist for Cartesian velocity monitoring functions ...........................................                          175 11.1.5       Checklist for axis-specific velocity monitoring functions .......................................                          176 11.1.6       Checklist for safe operational stop for axis groups ...............................................                        180 11.1.7       Checklist for cell area ...........................................................................................        182 11.1.8       Checklist for Cartesian monitoring spaces ...........................................................                      183 11.1.9       Checklist for axis-specific monitoring spaces .......................................................                      185 11.1.10 Checklist for safe tools ..........................................................................................             190 11.2 Applied norms and directives .....................................................................................                 192  12       KUKA Service ..............................................................................................                   193 12.1 Requesting support ....................................................................................................            193 12.2 KUKA Customer Support ...........................................................................................                  193  Index .............................................................................................................           201     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                         7 / 205           KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     8 / 205                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                    1 Introduction   1            Introduction t     1.1          Target group t     This documentation is aimed at users with the following knowledge and skills:                                 Advanced knowledge of the robot controller system                                 Advanced KRL programming skills  For optimal use of our products, we recommend that our customers                                     take part in a course of training at KUKA College. Information about                                     the training program can be found at www.kuka.com or can be ob-                              tained directly from our subsidiaries.   1.2          Industrial robot documentation  The industrial robot documentation consists of the following parts:                                 Documentation for the manipulator                                 Documentation for the robot controller                                 Operating and programming instructions for the System Software                                 Instructions for options and accessories                                 Parts catalog on storage medium                             Each of these sets of instructions is a separate document.   1.3          Representation of warnings and notes  Safety                      These warnings are relevant to safety and must be observed.  These warnings mean that it is certain or highly probable                                                     that death or severe injuries will occur, if no precautions                              are taken.  These warnings mean that death or severe injuries may                                                     occur, if no precautions are taken.  These warnings mean that minor injuries may occur, if                                                     no precautions are taken.  These warnings mean that damage to property may oc-                                                     cur, if no precautions are taken.  These warnings contain references to safety-relevant information or                                     general safety measures.                                     These warnings do not refer to individual hazards or individual pre-                              cautionary measures.  This warning draws attention to procedures which serve to prevent or remedy                             emergencies or malfunctions:  Procedures marked with this warning must be followed                                                      exactly.  Notices                     These notices serve to make your work easier or contain references to further                             information.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            9 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Tip to make your work easier or reference to further information.     1.4       Terms used  Term                  Description                                      Axis range            Range of an axis in degrees or millimeters within                                                            which the axis moves. The axis range is defined by                                                            a lower and an upper axis limit.                                      Axis limit            An axis has 2 axis limits which define the axis range.                                                            There is an upper and a lower axis limit.                                      Stopping distance     Stopping distance = reaction distance + braking dis-                                                            tance                                                            The stopping distance is part of the danger zone.                                      Workspace             Monitoring space that the defined axes or the safe                                                            tool are not allowed to leave. The axes or the safe                                                            tool must always move within the limits of the work-                                                            space.                                                             (>>> 2.2.3 "Cartesian workspaces" Page 20)                                                             (>>> 2.2.5 "Axis-specific workspaces" Page 22)                                      CIP Safety            CIP Safety is an Ethernet/IP-based safety interface                                                            for connecting a safety PLC to the robot controller.                                                            (PLC = master, robot controller = slave)                                                             (>>> 8.1.1 "SafeOperation via Ethernet safety inter-                                                            face (optional)" Page 129)                                      CK                    Customer-built Kinematics                                      EtherNet/IP           EtherNet/IP is an Ethernet-based field bus (Ethernet                                                            interface).                                                             (>>> 8.1.2 "Diagnostic signals via Ethernet inter-                                                            face" Page 133)                                      Danger zone           The danger zone consists of the workspace and the                                                            stopping distances.                                      Mastering test        The mastering test verifies whether the current posi-                                                            tion of the robot and the additional axes matches a                                                            reference position.                                                             (>>> 7.6 "Mastering test" Page 98)                                      KL                    KUKA linear unit                                      Alarm space           An alarm space signals a workspace violation by                                                            setting an output. The alarm spaces are perma-                                                            nently assigned to the configurable outputs of the                                                            interface options PROFIsafe, CIP Safety or X13                                                            (Extended SIB).                                      Monitoring time       During the monitoring time, the user is prompted to                                                            perform the mastering test.                                      Polygon, convex       A convex polygon is a polygon consisting of at least                                                            3 different corners. Triangles and squares are exam-                                                            ples of convex polygons.                                                             (>>> 2.2.2 "Cell area" Page 19)     10 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                   1 Introduction   Term                         Description                           PROFINET                     PROFINET is an Ethernet-based field bus (Ethernet                                                        interface).                                                         (>>> 8.1.2 "Diagnostic signals via Ethernet inter-                                                        face" Page 133)                           PROFIsafe                    PROFIsafe is a PROFINET-based safety interface                                                        for connecting a safety PLC to the robot controller.                                                        (PLC = master, robot controller = slave)                                                         (>>> 8.1.1 "SafeOperation via Ethernet safety inter-                                                        face (optional)" Page 129)                           Reference group              A reference group contains the axes of a kinematic                                                        system that are required for moving to a reference                                                        position and are to be subjected to safe monitoring.                           Reference position           The reference position is a Cartesian position to                                                        which the robot moves during the mastering test.                                                        (>>> 7.6.4 "Selecting a reference position"                                                        Page 101)                           Reference stop               Safety stop that is triggered if the mastering test has                                                        not been performed. The reference stop can be acti-                                                        vated for monitoring spaces.                                                        (>>> 2.2.8 "Reference stop" Page 25)                           Reference switch             To perform the mastering test, a reference button is                                                        required. The reference position is confirmed using                                                        the reference button.                                                        (>>> 2.6 "Reference switch module" Page 28)                           Protected space              Monitoring space into which the defined axes or the                                                        safe tool are not allowed to intrude. The axes or the                                                        safe tool must always move outside the limits of the                                                        protected space.                                                        (>>> 2.2.4 "Cartesian protected spaces" Page 21)                                                        (>>> 2.2.6 "Axis-specific protected spaces"                                                        Page 23)                           SIB                          Safety Interface Board                           Safety STOP 0                A stop that is triggered and executed by the safety                                                        controller. The safety controller immediately                                                        switches off the drives and the power supply to the                                                        brakes.                                                        Note: This stop is called safety STOP 0 in this docu-                                                        ment.                           Safety STOP 1                A stop that is triggered and monitored by the safety                                                        controller. The braking operation is carried out by                                                        the non-safety-oriented section of the robot control-                                                        ler and monitored by the safety controller. As soon                                                        as the manipulator is has stopped, the safety con-                                                        troller deactivates the drives and the power supply                                                        of the brakes.                                                        Note: This stop is called safety STOP 1 in this docu-                                                        ment.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                               11 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Term               Description                                     Safety STOP 2      A stop that is triggered and monitored by the safety                                                        controller. The braking operation is carried out by                                                        the non-safety-oriented section of the robot control-                                                        ler and monitored by the safety controller. The drives                                                        remain activated and the brakes released.                                                        Note: This stop is called safety STOP 2 in this docu-                                                        ment.                                     Safe operational   In the event of a safe operational stop, the system                                     stop               monitors standstill of the axes for which the safe                                                        operational stop is configured. When the axes are at                                                        a monitored standstill, they may move within the                                                        configured axis angle or distance tolerances.                                                        (>>> 2.5 "Safe operational stop for axis groups"                                                        Page 28)                                     Safe tools         A safe tool can be modeled using up to 6 configu-                                                        rable spheres. These spheres are monitored against                                                        the limits of the Cartesian monitoring spaces. Each                                                        safe tool has a safe TCP against which the config-                                                        ured velocity limits are monitored.                                                        (>>> 2.3 "Safe tools" Page 26)                                     Monitoring space   A monitoring space can be defined in Cartesian                                                        terms or axis-specifically and as a workspace or pro-                                                        tected space.                                                        (>>> 2.2 "Monitoring spaces" Page 14)                                     Cell area          Cartesian workspace that forms a convex polygon                                                        with 3 … 10 vertices (corners) and is limited in ±Z                                                        direction. The cell area is the maximum permitted                                                        working range of the robot.                                                        (>>> 2.2.2 "Cell area" Page 19)     12 / 205                                                       Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                           2 Product description   2            Product description 2     2.1 t              Overview of SafeOperation  Functions                   SafeOperation is a safety option with software and hardware components and s     the following functions:                                 Safe monitoring of a maximum of 16 user-defined, axis-specific or Carte-                                  sian monitoring spaces                                 Safe monitoring of a user-defined cell area                                 Safe monitoring of axis-specific velocities                                 Safe monitoring of space-specific velocities                                 Safe monitoring of Cartesian velocities                                 Modeling of up to 16 safe tools with safe TCP                                 Safe stop via safety controller                                 Safe operational stop for up to 6 axis groups                                 Connection to a higher-level controller, e.g. to a safety PLC                                 Safe inputs for activation of the monitoring functions                                 Safe outputs for status messages of the monitoring functions                                 Creation and editing of the safety configuration on the robot controller or                                  in WorkVisual.  Information about the safety configuration in WorkVisual is contained                                       in the WorkVisual documentation.   Areas of appli-                 Human-robot cooperation cation                          Direct loading of workpieces without an intermediate support                                 Replacement of conventional axis range monitoring systems  SafeOperation cannot and must not be used in conjunction with a CK.    Decouplable external axes are not supported by SafeOperation. In                                       the case of decouplable external axes, safe position sensing is not                                       possible, as the machine data change while the controller is running.  Functional                  The components of the industrial robot move within the limits that have been principle                   configured and activated. The actual positions are continuously calculated and                             monitored against the safety parameters that have been set.                             The safety controller monitors the industrial robot by means of the safety pa-                             rameters that have been set. If a component of the industrial robot violates a                             monitoring limit or a safety parameter, the robot and external axes (optional)                             are stopped.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          13 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     Fig. 2-1: Example of a cell with SafeOperation  1   Reference switch                     5    System control panel                                          2   Robot                                6    Robot controller                                          3   Loading station                      7    Bending machine                                          4   Safety mat  Components                These software components are included in the SafeOperation package:                                         KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2                                      These hardware components are included in the SafeOperation package:                                         Reference switch module  Brake test                The brake test serves as a diagnostic measure for the robot axis and external                                      axis brakes. The brakes are activated for the stop reactions safety stop 0 and                                      safety stop 1.                                      If a safety option is installed and the safe monitoring is active, the brake test is                                      automatically active.  Interfaces                Various interfaces are available for connection to a higher-level controller. The                                      safe I/Os of these interfaces can be used, for example, to signal a violation of                                      safety monitoring functions.                                         Ethernet safety interfaces:                                             PROFINET/PROFIsafe                                             EtherNet/IP/CIP Safety                                         Discrete safety interface for safety options:                                             X13 via Extended SIB   2.2       Monitoring spaces  A maximum of 16 monitoring spaces can be configured. A cell area must also                                      be configured.     14 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                        2 Product description   Monitoring space         A monitoring space can be defined as a Cartesian cuboid or by means of indi-                          vidual axis ranges. Each monitoring space can be set as a workspace or pro-                          tected space.                           (>>> 2.2.3 "Cartesian workspaces" Page 20)                           (>>> 2.2.4 "Cartesian protected spaces" Page 21)                           (>>> 2.2.5 "Axis-specific workspaces" Page 22)                           (>>> 2.2.6 "Axis-specific protected spaces" Page 23)                          For every monitoring space, a space-specific Cartesian velocity can be de-                          fined inside or outside the monitoring space.                           (>>> 2.2.7 "Space-specific velocity" Page 25)                          For each monitoring space, a reference stop can be set that stops the robot if                          no mastering test has been carried out.                           (>>> 2.2.8 "Reference stop" Page 25)                          Monitoring can be activated and deactivated for each individual monitoring                          space, or activated by means of safe inputs.                          Safe outputs are permanently assigned to the monitoring spaces. The safe                          outputs are set if a monitoring space is violated.                          Whether or not a stop is triggered at the space limit is a function that can be                          configured.  Cell area                The cell area is a Cartesian workspace in the form of a convex polygon with 3                          to 10 corners and is limited in the ±Z direction.                           (>>> 2.2.2 "Cell area" Page 19)                          The cell area is permanently monitored and always active. The corners can be                          configured, activated and deactivated individually.                          A safety stop 0 is always triggered at the space limit.  Stopping                 If the robot is stopped by a monitoring function, it requires a certain stopping distance                 distance before coming to a standstill.                          The stopping distance depends primarily on the following factors:                              Robot type                              Velocity of the robot                              Position of the robot axes                              Payload  The stopping distance when a monitoring function is triggered varies                                    according to the specific robot type. This aspect must be taken into                                    account by the system integrator during parameterization of the mon-                           itoring functions as part of the safety assessment.  Further information about the stopping distances and stopping times                                    can be found in the assembly or operating instructions of the relevant                                    robot.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          15 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Stop reactions             Stop reaction        Description                                 Example             Safety stop 0        The stop is triggered in T2, AUT or         Robot exceeds the limit of an acti-                                  AUT EXT mode if a monitoring func-          vated workspace in Automatic mode.                                  tion is already activated and the                                  robot then exceeds the monitoring                                  space limit.             Safety stop 1        The stop is triggered if the robot          Robot exceeds the limit of an acti-                                  exceeds a monitoring space limit in         vated workspace in T1 mode.                                  T1 mode.                                  The stop is triggered if a monitoring       A protected space in which the robot                                  function is just being activated and        is currently situated is activated by a                                  the robot has already exceeded the          safety mat.                                  monitoring space limit.                                  The stop is triggered if a reference        After a restart of the robot controller,                                  stop is activated for an activated          the safety controller requests a mas-                                  monitoring space and the robot              tering test. The robot continues to                                  exceeds the monitoring space limit          move during the monitoring time and                                  after an internal mastering test            exceeds in T2 mode the limit of an                                  request in T2, AUT or AUT EXT               activated protected space for which                                  mode.                                       the reference stop is activated.   2.2.1     Coordinate systems  Overview                  The following Cartesian coordinate systems are defined in the robot controller:                                         WORLD                                         ROBROOT                                         BASE                                         TOOL     Fig. 2-2: Overview of coordinate systems    16 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                        2 Product description   Description              WORLD                          The WORLD coordinate system is a permanently defined Cartesian coordi-                          nate system. It is the root coordinate system for the ROBROOT and BASE co-                          ordinate systems.                          By default, the WORLD coordinate system is located at the robot base.                          ROBROOT                          The ROBROOT coordinate system is a Cartesian coordinate system, which is                          always located at the robot base. It defines the position of the robot relative to                          the WORLD coordinate system.                          By default, the ROBROOT coordinate system is identical to the WORLD coor-                          dinate system. $ROBROOT allows the definition of an offset of the robot rela-                          tive to the WORLD coordinate system.                          BASE                          The BASE coordinate system is a Cartesian coordinate system that defines                          the position of the workpiece. It is relative to the WORLD coordinate system.                          By default, the BASE coordinate system is identical to the WORLD coordinate                          system. It is offset to the workpiece by the user.   TOOL                          The TOOL coordinate system is a Cartesian coordinate system which is locat-                          ed at the tool center point.                          By default, the origin of the TOOL coordinate system is located at the flange                          center point. (In this case it is called the FLANGE coordinate system.) The                          TOOL coordinate system is offset to the tool center point by the user.   Angles of rotation of the robot coordinate systems  Angle                        Rotation about axis                            Angle A                      Rotation about the Z axis                            Angle B                      Rotation about the Y axis                            Angle C                      Rotation about the X axis     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          17 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   2.2.1.1   Special cases     Fig. 2-3: ROBROOT coordinate system Jet  In the case of Jet robots, the ROBROOT coordinate system is fixed. They do                                      not move with the robot.     Fig. 2-4: ROBROOT coordinate system KL  In the case of a KL, the relationship between the ROBROOT coordinate sys-                                      tem and the WORLD coordinate system changes. The ROBROOT coordinate                                      system moves with the robot on the KL.     18 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                          2 Product description   2.2.2     Cell area  Description              The cell area is a Cartesian monitoring space that is limited in the ±Z direction.                          The safe tool on the mounting flange of the robot is modeled using up to 6 con-                          figurable spheres; when the robot moves, these spheres move with it. These                          spheres are monitored against the cell area and must only move within this cell                          area. If a sphere violates the limits of the cell area, the robot stops with a safety                          stop 0.  Cartesian monitoring spaces are only monitored against                                               the spheres used to model the safe tool. Robot compo-                           nents situated outside the tool spheres are not monitored and a space viola-                           tion by these components is not detected. Cartesian monitoring spaces and                           tool spheres must therefore be designed and configured in such a manner                           that the unmonitored robot components do not pose any threat.  The cell area is configured in the WORLD coordinate system as a convex poly-                          gon with 3 to 10 corners.                          A convex polygon is a polygon consisting of at least 3 different corners. The                          line segments between any 2 corners must not be outside the polygon. Trian-                          gles and squares are examples of convex polygons.     Fig. 2-5  1   Example of a convex polygon with 6 corners                              2   Example of a non-convex polygon with 6 corners  Example                  The diagram shows an example of a configured cell area.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            19 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     Fig. 2-6: Example of a cell area  1   Cell area                                          2   Safely monitored tool spheres                                          3   Robot   2.2.3     Cartesian workspaces  Description               The safe tool on the mounting flange of the robot is modeled using up to 6 con-                                      figurable spheres; when the robot moves, these spheres move with it. These                                      spheres are simultaneously monitored against the activated Cartesian work-                                      spaces and must move within the workspaces.                                      If a sphere violates the limit of a workspace, the following reactions can occur:                                         A safe output is reset (state: “logic 0”).                                          The safe outputs are set if a monitoring space is not violated (state: “logic                                          1”).                                          If interface X13 is used, safe outputs are only available for monitoring                                          spaces 1 … 6.                                         The robot is stopped (configurable).                                         Cartesian velocity monitoring is activated (configurable).  Cartesian monitoring spaces are only monitored against                                                          the spheres used to model the safe tool. Robot compo-                                      nents situated outside the tool spheres are not monitored and a space viola-                                      tion by these components is not detected. Cartesian monitoring spaces and                                      tool spheres must therefore be designed and configured in such a manner                                      that the unmonitored robot components do not pose any threat.  Only KUKA linear units are supported as ROBROOT kinematic sys-                                               tems.   Example                   The diagram shows an example of a configured Cartesian workspace.     20 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                         2 Product description     Fig. 2-7: Example of a Cartesian workspace  1   Working space                              2   Safely monitored tool spheres                              3   Robot   2.2.4     Cartesian protected spaces  Description              The safe tool on the mounting flange of the robot is modeled using up to 6 con-                          figurable spheres; when the robot moves, these spheres move with it. These                          spheres are simultaneously monitored against the activated Cartesian protect-                          ed spaces and must move outside the protected spaces.                          The length, width and height of a protected space must not fall below the pre-                          defined minimum value. This value depends on the global maximum Cartesian                          velocity and the radius of the smallest sphere of the safe tool.                           (>>> "Minimum protected space dimensions" Page 72)                          If a sphere violates the limit of a protected space, the following reactions can                          occur:                              A safe output is reset (state: “logic 0”).                               The safe outputs are set if a monitoring space is not violated (state: “logic                               1”).                               If interface X13 is used, safe outputs are only available for monitoring                               spaces 1 … 6.                              The robot is stopped (configurable).                              Cartesian velocity monitoring is activated (configurable).  Cartesian monitoring spaces are only monitored against                                               the spheres used to model the safe tool. Robot compo-                           nents situated outside the tool spheres are not monitored and a space viola-                           tion by these components is not detected. Cartesian monitoring spaces and                           tool spheres must therefore be designed and configured in such a manner                           that the unmonitored robot components do not pose any threat.  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           21 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Only KUKA linear units are supported as ROBROOT kinematic sys-                                               tems.   Example                   The diagram shows an example of a Cartesian protected space.     Fig. 2-8: Example of a Cartesian protected space  1   Protected space                                          2   Safely monitored tool spheres                                          3   Robot   2.2.5     Axis-specific workspaces  Description               The axis limits can be set and monitored individually for each axis via the soft-                                      ware. The resulting axis range is the permissible range of an axis within which                                      the robot may move. The individual axis ranges together make up the overall                                      workspace, which may consist of up to 8 axis ranges.  A maximum of 8 axes or, in the case of kinematic systems with mas-                                               ter/slave axes, a maximum of 8 drives can be configured for each                                               monitoring space.  If the robot violates an axis limit, the following reactions can occur:                                         A safe output is reset (state: “logic 0”).                                          The safe outputs are set if a monitoring space is not violated (state: “logic                                          1”).                                          If interface X13 is used, safe outputs are only available for monitoring                                          spaces 1 … 6.                                         The robot is stopped (configurable).                                         Cartesian velocity monitoring is activated (configurable).     22 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                         2 Product description   Example                  The diagram shows an example of an axis-specific workspace. The work-                          space of axis 1 is configured from -110° to +130° and corresponds to the per-                          missible motion range of the robot.     Fig. 2-9: Example of an axis-specific workspace  1   Workspace                             3   Stopping distance                              2   Robot                                 4   Protected space   2.2.6     Axis-specific protected spaces  Description              The axis limits can be set and monitored individually for each axis via the soft-                          ware. The resulting axis range is the protected range of an axis within which                          the robot may not move. The individual axis ranges together make up the pro-                          tected space, which may consist of up to 8 axis ranges.  A maximum of 8 axes or, in the case of kinematic systems with mas-                                    ter/slave axes, a maximum of 8 drives can be configured for each                                    monitoring space.  If the robot violates an axis limit, the following reactions can occur:                              A safe output is reset (state: “logic 0”).                               The safe outputs are set if a monitoring space is not violated (state: “logic                               1”).                               If interface X13 is used, safe outputs are only available for monitoring                               spaces 1 … 6.                              The robot is stopped (configurable).                              Cartesian velocity monitoring is activated (configurable).  In the case of axes that can rotate more than 360°, e.g.                                                axis 1, the configured axis ranges refer to the position of                           the axis (including sign) and not to the sector of a circle. Serious injury and                           severe damage to the robot can be caused. If, for example, a protected                           space of +90° to +270° is configured, the robot can move through the protect-                           ed space in the other direction from -90° to -185°. In this case, it is advisable                           to configure a workspace from -90° to +90°.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           23 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     Fig. 2-10: Example of an axis-specific protected space through which the                                     robot can move  1   Workspace                          3       Protected space                                       2   Robot                              4       Protected space through                                                                                      which the robot can move  Example                  The diagram shows an example of an axis-specific protected space. The safe-                                     guarded space and the stopping distances correspond to the configured pro-                                     tected space. The motion range of axis 1 is limited to -185° to +185° by means                                     of software limit switches. The protected space is configured from -110° to                                     -10°. This results in 2 permissible motion ranges for the robot, separated by                                     the configured protected space.     Fig. 2-11: Example of an axis-specific protected space  1   Permissible range 1                    4   Protected space                                       2   Robot                                  5   Permissible range 2                                       3   Stopping distance   24 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                        2 Product description   2.2.7     Space-specific velocity  Description              For Cartesian and axis-specific monitoring spaces, a Cartesian velocity can be                          defined which is monitored if the space is violated or not violated. A safe TCP                          is defined for every safe tool. This safe TCP is monitored against a configured                          velocity limit. If the safe TCP exceeds the velocity limit, the robot is stopped                          safely.  Example                  The diagram shows an example of a Cartesian workspace. If the safe TCP on                          the safe tool exceeds the velocity limit inside the workspace, the robot is                          stopped with a safety stop 0.     Fig. 2-12: Space-specific velocity example  1   Working space                              2   Safely monitored tool spheres                              3   Robot   2.2.8     Reference stop  Description              A reference stop can be activated for monitoring spaces. (= function Stop if                          mastering test not yet done)                          If the reference stop is activated and the following conditions are met, the robot                          can only be moved in T1 mode:                              Monitoring space is activated.                              Mastering test is requested internally.                          If the reference stop is activated and the following preconditions are met, the                          robot stops with a safety stop 1:                              Monitoring space is activated.                              Mastering test is requested internally.                              Operating mode T2, AUT or AUT EXT    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          25 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   To be able to move the robot again in the stop-triggering operating modes, the                                      following possibilities are available:                                         Perform mastering test in T1 mode.                                         Deactivate monitoring spaces.                                         Deactivate reference stop.   2.3       Safe tools  Description               Up to 16 safe tools can be defined. A safe TCP is defined for each safe tool                                      and monitored against the configured velocity limits.                                      A safe tool can be modeled using up to 6 configurable spheres. These spheres                                      are monitored against the limits of the Cartesian monitoring spaces.                                      The sphere radius must not fall below the predefined minimum value. This ra-                                      dius is dependent on the global maximum Cartesian velocity.                                      (>>> "Minimum sphere radius" Page 72)                                      The safe tools are activated using safe inputs. Only one safe tool may be ac-                                      tive at any time.  If interface X13 is used, tool 1 is always active. The tool cannot be ac-                                              tivated via a safe input. An automated, safely monitored tool change                                              is thus not possible.  The safe TCP for the velocity monitoring can be freely configured in                                              the safety configuration. It is independent of the current TCP that is                                              set in the KUKA System Software with the variable $TOOL.  Cartesian monitoring spaces are only monitored against                                                          the spheres used to model the safe tool. Robot compo-                                      nents situated outside the tool spheres are not monitored and a space viola-                                      tion by these components is not detected. Cartesian monitoring spaces and                                      tool spheres must therefore be designed and configured in such a manner                                      that the unmonitored robot components do not pose any threat.  Example                   The diagram shows an example of a safe tool. 2 spheres and a safe TCP are                                      defined on the safe tool of the robot by means of the FLANGE coordinate sys-                                      tem.     26 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                       2 Product description     Fig. 2-13: Safe tool   2.4       Velocity monitoring functions  Axis-specific and Cartesian velocities can be monitored.  Axis velocity            The velocity of every axis is monitored against a limit value:                              Limit value for reduced axis velocity (optional)                              Limit value for maximum axis velocity for T1 mode  Monitoring of the maximum axis velocity in T1 mode is part of the                                    standard safety configuration and always active.      Limit value for maximum axis velocity (valid globally for every axis)  Cartesian velocity       The Cartesian velocity at the safe TCP of the active safe tool is monitored. The                          velocity monitoring is always relative to $WORLD:                              Limit value for the reduced velocity at the safe TCP (optional)                              Limit value for the reduced velocity at the safe TCP for T1 mode                              Limit value for the global maximum velocity at the safe TCP and at the                               sphere center points of the safe tool (not space-dependent)                              Space-specific velocity                               (>>> 2.2.7 "Space-specific velocity" Page 25)  Stop reactions  Stop reaction          Description                               Example  Safety stop 0          The stop is triggered if a monitoring     In automatic operation, the robot                         function is already activated and the     exceeds the activated limit value for                         robot then exceeds the monitoring         reduced axis velocity.                         limit.  Safety stop 1          The stop is triggered if a monitoring     The safe reduced velocity, for which                         function is just being activated and      the limit value has already been                         the robot has already exceeded the        exceeded by the robot, is activated                         monitoring limit.                         by a safety mat.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                         27 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   2.5       Safe operational stop for axis groups  Description               The global safe operational stop is one of the standard safety functions. If it is                                      activated via the safety interface, the standstill of all axes of the kinematic sys-                                      tem is monitored. The axes may still move within the configured axis angle or                                      distance tolerances. These can be configured individually for each axis.                                      With SafeOperation, the safe operational stop can additionally be configured                                      for up to 6 axis groups. An axis group comprises the axes that are to be mon-                                      itored when the safe operational stop is activated for this axis group. Before                                      monitoring is activated, the corresponding axes must be stopped under pro-                                      gram control.  A maximum of 8 axes or, in the case of kinematic systems with mas-                                               ter/slave axes, a maximum of 8 drives can be configured for each axis                                               group.  If the safe operational stop is activated for an axis group, the standstill of the                                      axes for which it has been configured is monitored using failsafe technology.                                      The axes may still move within the configured axis angle or distance toleranc-                                      es.                                      If the safe operational stop is violated, i.e. if the position tolerance for an axis                                      is exceeded or the velocity of an axis exceeds the maximum permitted level,                                      a safety stop 0 is triggered in response. The safety stop 0 affects all axes, not                                      just those for which the operational stop is configured. This means that an un-                                      intended motion of an axis relevant for the safe operational stop causes the                                      machine to stop.   2.6       Reference switch module  Description               A reference switch module consists of the following components:                                         Inductive reference switch XS Ref                                         Straight or angled actuating plate                                         Reference cable X42 - XS Ref                                         Reference connector X42     Fig. 2-14: Reference group hardware components  1   Inductive reference switch           2    Straight actuating plate  In combination with a straight or angled actuating plate, reference switch mod-                                      ules are available with different cable lengths.     28 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                         2 Product description   Length                       Actuating plate                            7m                           Straight or angled                            15 m                            25 m                            40 m   2.7       Connecting cables  Overview                 The diagram shows an example of the connecting cables of the industrial robot                          with connected reference switch. The reference switch is connected via the                          reference cable to the robot controller. The maximum hose length is 40 m.  In the case of a KR C4, only 1 reference switch can be connected di-                                  rectly to the robot controller. If multiple reference groups are required,                                  the reference switches can be connected to the safety PLC and acti-                           vated via PROFIsafe or CIP Safety. The safety PLC must evaluate the refer-                           ence switches and set the input Mastering test accordingly.  A KR C4 compact is not equipped with a connection allowing a refer-                                  ence switch to be connected to the robot controller. Reference switch-                                  es must be connected to the safety PLC and activated via PROFIsafe                           or CIP Safety. The safety PLC must evaluate the reference switches and set                           the input Mastering test accordingly.     Fig. 2-15: Overview of connecting cables  Pos.       Description                                1        Robot controller                                2        Robot                                3        Reference switch XS Ref                                4        Reference cable X42 - XS Ref (maximum cable length 40 m)                                5        Data cable X21     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           29 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Cables must not be connected and disconnected during                                                           operation. Only the reference cable X42 - XS Ref sup-                                     plied by KUKA Roboter GmbH may be used. Reference cable X42 - XS Ref                                     is suitable for use in a cable carrier. The minimum bending radii must be ob-                                     served when routing cables.  Type of routing                           Bending radius                                     Fixed installation                        Min. 5xØ of cable                                     Installation in cable carrier             Min. 10xØ of cable     30 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                             3 Technical data   3 T              Technical data  3.1          Service life  t                             The maximum permissible service life of safety-relevant hardware compo-                             nents is 20 years. Once this time has been reached, the safety-relevant hard-                             ware components must be exchanged.   3.2          Reference switch  Basic data                               Designation                                       Values                               Ambient temperature                               -25 °C to +70 °C                               Switching function                                Break contact                               DC operating voltage or HIGH level in the case    24 V                               of pulsed operating voltage of the reference                               switch                               Permissible range for the DC operating voltage    20 … 33 V                               or HIGH level UB(HIGH) for pulsed voltage                               LOW level UB(LOW) for pulsed voltage              0…5V                               Required pulse duty factor T(HIGH):T(LOW) for     Min. 4:1                               pulsed voltage                               Supported pulse duration T(LOW) for pulsed        0.1 … 20 ms                               voltage                               Protection rating                                 IP67                               Operating current (power consumption) without     5 mA                               load                               Permissible load current                          max. 250 mA                               Permissible switching frequency                   max. 500 Hz                               Permissible switching distance at the proximity   0 … 4 mm                               switch surfaces                               Short circuit and overload protection, pulsed     Yes                               Outputs                                                PNP                                                                                      LOW-active                                                                                      Dual-channel                               LED function indicator                            Yes                               Hysteresis when installed                         0.2 … 1 mm                               EMC conformity                                    IEC 60947-5-2  Pulse duty factor     Fig. 3-1: Pulse duty factor for pulsed voltage     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       31 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Hole pattern     Fig. 3-2: Hole pattern for reference switch  1   2 holes for fastening elements, Ø 6.6 mm                                        2   2 holes for roll pins, Ø 4 mm   3.3       Connector pin assignment of reference cable X42-XS Ref     Fig. 3-3: Connector pin allocation for reference cable X42 - XS Ref     Fig. 3-4: Wiring diagram for reference cable X42 - XS Ref     32 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                       3 Technical data   3.4       Circuit digram of reference switch XS Ref     Fig. 3-5: Circuit diagram of reference switch XS Ref  1   Switching element, channel A     2   Switching element, channel B   3.5       Hole pattern for actuating plate     Fig. 3-6: Hole pattern for actuating plate  1   2 M6 threaded holes for fastening elements                              2   2 holes for fastening elements, Ø 9 mm    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                    33 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     34 / 205                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                       4 Safety   4            Safety 4     f     t     4.1          General y     4.1.1        Liability  The device described in this document is either an industrial robot or a com-                             ponent thereof.                             Components of the industrial robot:                                 Manipulator                                 Robot controller                                 Teach pendant                                 Connecting cables                                 External axes (optional)                                  e.g. linear unit, turn-tilt table, positioner                                 Software                                 Options, accessories                             The industrial robot is built using state-of-the-art technology and in accor-                             dance with the recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, misuse of the industrial                             robot may constitute a risk to life and limb or cause damage to the industrial                             robot and to other material property.                             The industrial robot may only be used in perfect technical condition in accor-                             dance with its designated use and only by safety-conscious persons who are                             fully aware of the risks involved in its operation. Use of the industrial robot is                             subject to compliance with this document and with the declaration of incorpo-                             ration supplied together with the industrial robot. Any functional disorders af-                             fecting safety must be rectified immediately.  Safety infor-               Safety information cannot be held against KUKA Roboter GmbH. Even if all mation                      safety instructions are followed, this is not a guarantee that the industrial robot                             will not cause personal injuries or material damage.                             No modifications may be carried out to the industrial robot without the autho-                             rization of KUKA Roboter GmbH. Additional components (tools, software,                             etc.), not supplied by KUKA Roboter GmbH, may be integrated into the indus-                             trial robot. The user is liable for any damage these components may cause to                             the industrial robot or to other material property.                             In addition to the Safety chapter, this document contains further safety instruc-                             tions. These must also be observed.   4.1.2        Intended use of the industrial robot  The industrial robot is intended exclusively for the use designated in the “Pur-                             pose” chapter of the operating instructions or assembly instructions.                             Any use or application deviating from the intended use is deemed to be misuse                             and is not allowed. The manufacturer is not liable for any damage resulting                             from such misuse. The risk lies entirely with the user.                             Operation of the industrial robot in accordance with its intended use also re-                             quires compliance with the operating and assembly instructions for the individ-                             ual components, with particular reference to the maintenance specifications.  Misuse                      Any use or application deviating from the intended use is deemed to be misuse                             and is not allowed. This includes e.g.:    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          35 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2      Transportation of persons and animals                                         Use as a climbing aid                                         Operation outside the specified operating parameters                                         Use in potentially explosive environments                                         Operation without additional safeguards                                         Outdoor operation                                         Underground operation   4.1.3     EC declaration of conformity and declaration of incorporation  The industrial robot constitutes partly completed machinery as defined by the                                      EC Machinery Directive. The industrial robot may only be put into operation if                                      the following preconditions are met:                                         The industrial robot is integrated into a complete system.                                          or: The industrial robot, together with other machinery, constitutes a com-                                          plete system.                                          or: All safety functions and safeguards required for operation in the com-                                          plete machine as defined by the EC Machinery Directive have been added                                          to the industrial robot.                                         The complete system complies with the EC Machinery Directive. This has                                          been confirmed by means of an assessment of conformity.  Declaration of            The system integrator must issue a declaration of conformity for the complete            conformity                system in accordance with the Machinery Directive. The declaration of confor-                                      mity forms the basis for the CE mark for the system. The industrial robot must                                      always be operated in accordance with the applicable national laws, regula-                                      tions and standards.                                      The robot controller is CE certified under the EMC Directive and the Low Volt-                                      age Directive.  Declaration of            The partly completed machinery is supplied with a declaration of incorporation            incorporation             in accordance with Annex II B of the EC Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC. The                                      assembly instructions and a list of essential requirements complied with in ac-                                      cordance with Annex I are integral parts of this declaration of incorporation.                                      The declaration of incorporation declares that the start-up of the partly com-                                      pleted machinery is not allowed until the partly completed machinery has been                                      incorporated into machinery, or has been assembled with other parts to form                                      machinery, and this machinery complies with the terms of the EC Machinery                                      Directive, and the EC declaration of conformity is present in accordance with                                      Annex II A.   4.1.4     Terms used  STOP 0, STOP 1 and STOP 2 are the stop definitions according to EN 60204-                                      1:2006.  Term                         Description             Axis range                   Range of each axis, in degrees or millimeters, within which it may move.                                          The axis range must be defined for each axis.             Stopping distance            Stopping distance = reaction distance + braking distance                                          The stopping distance is part of the danger zone.             Workspace                    Area within which the robot may move. The workspace is derived from                                          the individual axis ranges.    36 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                   4 Safety   Term                         Description User                         The user of the industrial robot can be the management, employer or                              delegated person responsible for use of the industrial robot. Danger zone                  The danger zone consists of the workspace and the stopping distances                              of the manipulator and external axes (optional). Service life                 The service life of a safety-relevant component begins at the time of                              delivery of the component to the customer.                              The service life is not affected by whether the component is used or not,                              as safety-relevant components are also subject to aging during storage. KUKA smartPAD                see “smartPAD” Manipulator                  The robot arm and the associated electrical installations Safety zone                  The safety zone is situated outside the danger zone. Safe operational stop        The safe operational stop is a standstill monitoring function. It does not                              stop the robot motion, but monitors whether the robot axes are station-                              ary. If these are moved during the safe operational stop, a safety stop                              STOP 0 is triggered.                              The safe operational stop can also be triggered externally.                              When a safe operational stop is triggered, the robot controller sets an                              output to the field bus. The output is set even if not all the axes were sta-                              tionary at the time of triggering, thereby causing a safety stop STOP 0 to                              be triggered. Safety STOP 0                A stop that is triggered and executed by the safety controller. The safety                              controller immediately switches off the drives and the power supply to                              the brakes.                              Note: This stop is called safety STOP 0 in this document. Safety STOP 1                A stop that is triggered and monitored by the safety controller. The brak-                              ing operation is carried out by the non-safety-oriented section of the                              robot controller and monitored by the safety controller. As soon as the                              manipulator is has stopped, the safety controller deactivates the drives                              and the power supply of the brakes.                              When a safety STOP 1 is triggered, the robot controller sets an output to                              the field bus.                              The safety STOP 1 can also be triggered externally.                              Note: This stop is called safety STOP 1 in this document. Safety STOP 2                A stop that is triggered and monitored by the safety controller. The brak-                              ing operation is carried out by the non-safety-oriented section of the                              robot controller and monitored by the safety controller. The drives                              remain activated and the brakes released. As soon as the manipulator is                              at a standstill, a safe operational stop is triggered.                              When a safety STOP 2 is triggered, the robot controller sets an output to                              the field bus.                              The safety STOP 2 can also be triggered externally.                              Note: This stop is called safety STOP 2 in this document. Safety options               Generic term for options which make it possible to configure additional                              safe monitoring functions in addition to the standard safety functions.                              Example: SafeOperation smartPAD                     Programming device for the robot controller                              The smartPAD has all the operator control and display functions                              required for operating and programming the industrial robot.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                         37 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Term                         Description             Stop category 0              The drives are deactivated immediately and the brakes are applied. The                                          manipulator and any external axes (optional) perform path-oriented                                          braking.                                          Note: This stop category is called STOP 0 in this document.             Stop category 1              The manipulator and any external axes (optional) perform path-main-                                          taining braking.                                             Operating mode T1: The drives are deactivated as soon as the robot                                              has stopped, but no later than after 680 ms.                                             Operating mode T2, AUT (not available for VKR C4), AUT EXT: The                                              drives are switched off after 1.5 s.                                          Note: This stop category is called STOP 1 in this document.             Stop category 2              The drives are not deactivated and the brakes are not applied. The                                          manipulator and any external axes (optional) are braked with a path-                                          maintaining braking ramp.                                          Note: This stop category is called STOP 2 in this document.             System integrator            The system integrator is responsible for safely integrating the industrial             (plant integrator)           robot into a complete system and commissioning it.             T1                           Test mode, Manual Reduced Velocity (<= 250 mm/s)             T2                           Test mode, Manual High Velocity (> 250 mm/s permissible)             External axis                Motion axis which is not part of the manipulator but which is controlled                                          using the robot controller, e.g. KUKA linear unit, turn-tilt table, Posiflex.   4.2       Personnel  The following persons or groups of persons are defined for the industrial robot:                                         User                                         Personnel  All persons working with the industrial robot must have read and un-                                              derstood the industrial robot documentation, including the safety                                              chapter.  User                      The user must observe the labor laws and regulations. This includes e.g.:                                         The user must comply with his monitoring obligations.                                         The user must carry out briefing at defined intervals.  Personnel                 Personnel must be instructed, before any work is commenced, in the type of                                      work involved and what exactly it entails as well as any hazards which may ex-                                      ist. Instruction must be carried out regularly. Instruction is also required after                                      particular incidents or technical modifications.                                      Personnel includes:                                         System integrator                                         Operators, subdivided into:                                             Start-up, maintenance and service personnel                                             Operating personnel                                             Cleaning personnel  Installation, exchange, adjustment, operation, maintenance and re-                                             pair must be performed only as specified in the operating or assembly                                             instructions for the relevant component of the industrial robot and only                                      by personnel specially trained for this purpose.   38 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                  4 Safety   System integrator        The industrial robot is safely integrated into a complete system by the system                          integrator.                          The system integrator is responsible for the following tasks:                              Installing the industrial robot                              Connecting the industrial robot                              Performing risk assessment                              Implementing the required safety functions and safeguards                              Issuing the declaration of conformity                              Attaching the CE mark                              Creating the operating instructions for the complete system  Operator                 The operator must meet the following preconditions:                              The operator must be trained for the work to be carried out.                              Work on the industrial robot must only be carried out by qualified person-                               nel. These are people who, due to their specialist training, knowledge and                               experience, and their familiarization with the relevant standards, are able                               to assess the work to be carried out and detect any potential hazards.  Work on the electrical and mechanical equipment of the industrial ro-                                    bot may only be carried out by specially trained personnel.    4.3        Workspace, safety zone and danger zone  Workspaces are to be restricted to the necessary minimum size. A workspace                          must be safeguarded using appropriate safeguards.                          The safeguards (e.g. safety gate) must be situated inside the safety zone. In                          the case of a stop, the manipulator and external axes (optional) are braked                          and come to a stop within the danger zone.                          The danger zone consists of the workspace and the stopping distances of the                          manipulator and external axes (optional). It must be safeguarded by means of                          physical safeguards to prevent danger to persons or the risk of material dam-                          age.   4.3.1      Determining stopping distances  The system integrator’s risk assessment may indicate that the stopping dis-                          tances must be determined for an application. In order to determine the stop-                          ping distances, the system integrator must identify the safety-relevant points                          on the programmed path.                          When determining the stopping distances, the robot must be moved with the                          tool and loads which are also used in the application. The robot must be at op-                          erating temperature. This is the case after approx. 1 h in normal operation.                          During execution of the application, the robot must be stopped at the point                          from which the stopping distance is to be calculated. This process must be re-                          peated several times with a safety stop 0 and a safety stop 1. The least favor-                          able stopping distance is decisive.                          A safety stop 0 can be triggered by a safe operational stop via the safety inter-                          face, for example. If a safety option is installed, it can be triggered, for in-                          stance, by a space violation (e.g. the robot exceeds the limit of an activated                          workspace in Automatic mode).                          A safety stop 1 can be triggered by pressing the EMERGENCY STOP device                          on the smartPAD, for example.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        39 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   4.4       Triggers for stop reactions  Stop reactions of the industrial robot are triggered in response to operator ac-                                      tions or as a reaction to monitoring functions and error messages. The follow-                                      ing table shows the different stop reactions according to the operating mode                                      that has been set.  Trigger                               T1, T2                AUT, AUT EXT                                          Start key released                   STOP 2                          -                                          STOP key pressed                                   STOP 2                                          Drives OFF                                         STOP 1                                          “Motion enable” input                              STOP 2                                          drops out                                          Power switched off via                             STOP 0                                          main switch or power fail-                                          ure                                          Internal error in non-                       STOP 0 or STOP 1                                          safety-oriented part of the                                                                             (dependent on the cause of the error)                                          robot controller                                          Operating mode changed                         Safety stop 2                                          during operation                                          Safety gate opened (oper-                -                   Safety stop 1                                          ator safety)                                          Enabling switch released           Safety stop 2                    -                                          Enabling switch pressed            Safety stop 1                    -                                          fully down or error                                          E-STOP pressed                                 Safety stop 1                                          Error in safety controller                     Safety stop 0                                          or periphery of the safety                                          controller   4.5       Safety functions  4.5.1     Overview of the safety functions  The following safety functions are present in the industrial robot:                                           Selecting the operating mode                                           Operator safety (= connection for the monitoring of physical safeguards)                                           EMERGENCY STOP device                                           Enabling device                                           External safe operational stop                                           External safety stop 1                                           External safety stop 2                                           Velocity monitoring in T1                                      The safety functions of the industrial robot meet the following requirements:                                           Category 3 and Performance Level d in accordance with EN ISO 13849-                                            1                                      The requirements are only met on the following condition, however:                                           The EMERGENCY STOP device is pressed at least once every 12                                            months.                                      The following components are involved in the safety functions:   40 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     4 Safety       Safety controller in the control PC                              KUKA smartPAD                              Cabinet Control Unit (CCU)                              Resolver Digital Converter (RDC)                              KUKA Power Pack (KPP)                              KUKA Servo Pack (KSP)                              Safety Interface Board (SIB) (if used)                          There are also interfaces to components outside the industrial robot and to                          other robot controllers.  In the absence of operational safety functions and safe-                                                guards, the industrial robot can cause personal injury or                           material damage. If safety functions or safeguards are dismantled or deacti-                           vated, the industrial robot may not be operated.  During system planning, the safety functions of the overall system                                    must also be planned and designed. The industrial robot must be in-                                    tegrated into this safety system of the overall system.   4.5.2     Safety controller  The safety controller is a unit inside the control PC. It links safety-relevant sig-                          nals and safety-relevant monitoring functions.                          Safety controller tasks:                              Switching off the drives; applying the brakes                              Monitoring the braking ramp                              Standstill monitoring (after the stop)                              Velocity monitoring in T1                              Evaluation of safety-relevant signals                              Setting of safety-oriented outputs   4.5.3     Selecting the operating mode  Operating modes          The industrial robot can be operated in the following modes:                              Manual Reduced Velocity (T1)                              Manual High Velocity (T2)                              Automatic (AUT)                              Automatic External (AUT EXT)  Do not change the operating mode while a program is running. If the                                    operating mode is changed during program execution, the industrial                                    robot is stopped with a safety stop 2.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           41 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Operat-                                                      Use                        Velocities                                          ing mode                                                                                    Program verification:                                                                                     Programmed velocity, maxi-                                                      For test operation, pro-       mum 250 mm/s                                            T1        gramming and teach-                                                      ing                           Jog mode:                                                                                     Jog velocity, maximum                                                                                     250 mm/s                                                                                    Program verification:                                            T2        For test operation             Programmed velocity                                                                                    Jog mode: Not possible                                                      For industrial robots         Program mode:                                            AUT       without higher-level           Programmed velocity                                                      controllers                   Jog mode: Not possible                                                      For industrial robots         Program mode:                                          AUT EXT     with higher-level con-         Programmed velocity                                                      trollers, e.g. PLC            Jog mode: Not possible  Mode selector             The user can change the operating mode via the connection manager. The            switch                    connection manager is a view that is called by means of the mode selector                                      switch on the smartPAD.                                      The mode selector switch may be one of the following variants:                                          With key                                           It is only possible to change operating mode if the key is inserted.                                          Without key  If the smartPAD is fitted with a switch without a key:                                                            An additional device must be present to ensure that the                                      relevant functions cannot be executed by all users, but only by a restricted                                      group of people.                                      The device itself must not trigger motions of the industrial robot or other haz-                                      ards. If this device is missing, death or severe injuries may result.  The system integrator is responsible for ensuring that such a device is imple-                                      mented.   4.5.4     “Operator safety” signal  The “operator safety” signal is used for monitoring physical safeguards, e.g.                                      safety gates. Automatic operation is not possible without this signal. In the                                      event of a loss of signal during automatic operation (e.g. safety gate is                                      opened), the manipulator stops with a safety stop 1.                                      Operator safety is not active in modes T1 (Manual Reduced Velocity) and T2                                      (Manual High Velocity).     42 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                    4 Safety    Following a loss of signal, automatic operation may only                                                 be resumed when the safeguard has been closed and                           when the closing has been acknowledged. This acknowledgement is to pre-                           vent automatic operation from being resumed inadvertently while there are                           still persons in the danger zone, e.g. due to the safety gate closing acciden-                           tally.                           The acknowledgement must be designed in such a way that an actual check                           of the danger zone can be carried out first. Other acknowledgement functions                           (e.g. an acknowlegement which is automatically triggered by closure of the                           safeguard) are not permitted.                           The system integrator is responsible for ensuring that these criteria are met.                           Failure to met them may result in death, severe injuries or considerable dam-                           age to property.   4.5.5     EMERGENCY STOP device  The EMERGENCY STOP device for the industrial robot is the EMERGENCY                          STOP device on the smartPAD. The device must be pressed in the event of a                          hazardous situation or emergency.                          Reactions of the industrial robot if the EMERGENCY STOP device is pressed:                              The manipulator and any external axes (optional) are stopped with a safe-                               ty stop 1.                          Before operation can be resumed, the EMERGENCY STOP device must be                          turned to release it.  Tools and other equipment connected to the manipulator                                               must be integrated into the EMERGENCY STOP circuit                           on the system side if they could constitute a potential hazard.                           Failure to observe this precaution may result in death, severe injuries or con-                           siderable damage to property.  There must always be at least one external EMERGENCY STOP device in-                          stalled. This ensures that an EMERGENCY STOP device is available even                          when the smartPAD is disconnected.                           (>>> 4.5.7 "External EMERGENCY STOP device" Page 44)   4.5.6     Logging off from the higher-level safety controller  If the robot controller is connected to a higher-level safety controller, this con-                          nection will inevitably be terminated in the following cases:                              Switching off the voltage via the main switch of the robot                               Or power failure                              Shutdown of the robot controller via the smartHMI                              Activation of a WorkVisual project in WorkVisual or directly on the robot                               controller                              Changes to Start-up > Network configuration                              Changes to Configuration > Safety configuration                              I/O drivers > Reconfigure                              Restoration of an archive                          Effect of the interruption:                              If a discrete safety interface is used, this triggers an EMERGENCY STOP                               for the overall system.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          43 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2      If the Ethernet interface is used, the KUKA safety controller generates a                                          signal that prevents the higher-level controller from triggering an EMER-                                          GENCY STOP for the overall system.  If the Ethernet safety interface is used: In his risk assessment, the                                              system integrator must take into consideration whether the fact that                                              switching off the robot controller does not trigger an EMERGENCY                                      STOP of the overall system could constitute a hazard and, if so, how this haz-                                      ard can be countered.                                      Failure to take this into consideration may result in death, injuries or damage                                      to property.  If a robot controller is switched off, the E-STOP device on                                                          the smartPAD is no longer functional. The user is re-                                      sponsible for ensuring that the smartPAD is either covered or removed from                                      the system. This serves to prevent operational and non-operational EMER-                                      GENCY STOP devices from becoming interchanged.                                      Failure to observe this precaution may result in death, injuries or damage to                                      property.   4.5.7     External EMERGENCY STOP device  Every operator station that can initiate a robot motion or other potentially haz-                                      ardous situation must be equipped with an EMERGENCY STOP device. The                                      system integrator is responsible for ensuring this.                                      There must always be at least one external EMERGENCY STOP device in-                                      stalled. This ensures that an EMERGENCY STOP device is available even                                      when the smartPAD is disconnected.                                      External EMERGENCY STOP devices are connected via the customer inter-                                      face. External EMERGENCY STOP devices are not included in the scope of                                      supply of the industrial robot.   4.5.8     Enabling device  The enabling devices of the industrial robot are the enabling switches on the                                      smartPAD.                                      There are 3 enabling switches installed on the smartPAD. The enabling                                      switches have 3 positions:                                         Not pressed                                         Center position                                         Panic position                                      In the test modes, the manipulator can only be moved if one of the enabling                                      switches is held in the central position.                                         Releasing the enabling switch triggers a safety stop 2.                                         Pressing the enabling switch down fully (panic position) triggers a safety                                          stop 1.                                         It is possible to hold 2 enabling switches in the center position simultane-                                          ously for up to 15 seconds. This makes it possible to adjust grip from one                                          enabling switch to another one. If 2 enabling switches are held simultane-                                          ously in the center position for longer than 15 seconds, this triggers a safe-                                          ty stop 1.                                      If an enabling switch malfunctions (e.g. jams in the central position), the indus-                                      trial robot can be stopped using the following methods:                                         Press the enabling switch down fully.  44 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                    4 Safety       Actuate the EMERGENCY STOP device.                              Release the Start key.  The enabling switches must not be held down by adhe-                                                  sive tape or other means or tampered with in any other                           way.                           Death, injuries or damage to property may result.   4.5.9     External enabling device  External enabling devices are required if it is necessary for more than one per-                          son to be in the danger zone of the industrial robot.                          External enabling devices are not included in the scope of supply of the indus-                          trial robot.  Which interface can be used for connecting external enabling devices                                    is described in the “Planning” chapter of the robot controller operating                                    instructions and assembly instructions.   4.5.10    External safe operational stop  The safe operational stop can be triggered via an input on the customer inter-                          face. The state is maintained as long as the external signal is FALSE. If the                          external signal is TRUE, the manipulator can be moved again. No acknowl-                          edgement is required.   4.5.11    External safety stop 1 and external safety stop 2  Safety stop 1 and safety stop 2 can be triggered via an input on the customer                          interface. The state is maintained as long as the external signal is FALSE. If                          the external signal is TRUE, the manipulator can be moved again. No ac-                          knowledgement is required.                          If interface X11 is selected as the customer interface, only the signal Safety                          stop 2 is available.   4.5.12    Velocity monitoring in T1  The velocity at the mounting flange is monitored in T1 mode. If the velocity ex-                          ceeds 250 mm/s, a safety stop 0 is triggered.   4.6       Additional protective equipment  4.6.1     Jog mode  In the operating modes T1 (Manual Reduced Velocity) and T2 (Manual High                          Velocity), the robot controller can only execute programs in jog mode. This                          means that it is necessary to hold down an enabling switch and the Start key                          in order to execute a program.                              Releasing the enabling switch triggers a safety stop 2.                              Pressing the enabling switch down fully (panic position) triggers a safety                               stop 1.                              Releasing the Start key triggers a STOP 2.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                         45 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   4.6.2     Software limit switches  The axis ranges of all manipulator and positioner axes are limited by means of                                      adjustable software limit switches. These software limit switches only serve as                                      machine protection and must be adjusted in such a way that the manipula-                                      tor/positioner cannot hit the mechanical end stops.                                      The software limit switches are set during commissioning of an industrial ro-                                      bot.  Further information is contained in the operating and programming in-                                              structions.    4.6.3     Mechanical end stops  Depending on the robot variant, the axis ranges of the main and wrist axes of                                      the manipulator are partially limited by mechanical end stops.                                      Additional mechanical end stops can be installed on the external axes.  If the manipulator or an external axis hits an obstruction                                                          or a mechanical end stop or axis range limitation, the ma-                                      nipulator can no longer be operated safely. The manipulator must be taken                                      out of operation and KUKA Roboter GmbH must be consulted before it is put                                      back into operation .   4.6.4     Mechanical axis range limitation (optional)  Some manipulators can be fitted with mechanical axis range limitation in axes                                      A1 to A3. The adjustable axis range limitation systems restrict the working                                      range to the required minimum. This increases personal safety and protection                                      of the system.                                      In the case of manipulators that are not designed to be fitted with mechanical                                      axis range limitation, the workspace must be laid out in such a way that there                                      is no danger to persons or material property, even in the absence of mechan-                                      ical axis range limitation.                                      If this is not possible, the workspace must be limited by means of photoelectric                                      barriers, photoelectric curtains or obstacles on the system side. There must be                                      no shearing or crushing hazards at the loading and transfer areas.  This option is not available for all robot models. Information on spe-                                              cific robot models can be obtained from KUKA Roboter GmbH.    4.6.5     Axis range monitoring (optional)  Some manipulators can be fitted with dual-channel axis range monitoring sys-                                      tems in main axes A1 to A3. The positioner axes may be fitted with additional                                      axis range monitoring systems. The safety zone for an axis can be adjusted                                      and monitored using an axis range monitoring system. This increases person-                                      al safety and protection of the system.  This option is not available for all robot models. Information on spe-                                              cific robot models can be obtained from KUKA Roboter GmbH.     46 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     4 Safety   4.6.6     Options for moving the manipulator without drive energy   The system user is responsible for ensuring that the training of per-                                  sonnel with regard to the response to emergencies or exceptional sit-                                  uations also includes how the manipulator can be moved without                           drive energy.  Description              The following options are available for moving the manipulator without drive                          energy after an accident or malfunction:                              Release device (optional)                               The release device can be used for the main axis drive motors and, de-                               pending on the robot variant, also for the wrist axis drive motors.                              Brake release device (option)                               The brake release device is designed for robot variants whose motors are                               not freely accessible.                              Moving the wrist axes directly by hand                               There is no release device available for the wrist axes of variants in the low                               payload category. This is not necessary because the wrist axes can be                               moved directly by hand.  Information about the options available for the various robot models                                    and about how to use them can be found in the assembly and oper-                                    ating instructions for the robot or requested from KUKA Roboter                           GmbH.  Moving the manipulator without drive energy can dam-                                               age the motor brakes of the axes concerned. The motor                           must be replaced if the brake has been damaged. The manipulator may                           therefore be moved without drive energy only in emergencies, e.g. for rescu-                           ing persons.   4.6.7     Labeling on the industrial robot  All plates, labels, symbols and marks constitute safety-relevant parts of the in-                          dustrial robot. They must not be modified or removed.                          Labeling on the industrial robot consists of:                              Identification plates                              Warning signs                              Safety symbols                              Designation labels                              Cable markings                              Rating plates  Further information is contained in the technical data of the operating                                    instructions or assembly instructions of the components of the indus-                                    trial robot.   4.6.8     External safeguards  The access of persons to the danger zone of the industrial robot must be pre-                          vented by means of safeguards. It is the responsibility of the system integrator                          to ensure this.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          47 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Physical safeguards must meet the following requirements:                                           They meet the requirements of EN 953.                                           They prevent access of persons to the danger zone and cannot be easily                                            circumvented.                                           They are sufficiently fastened and can withstand all forces that are likely                                            to occur in the course of operation, whether from inside or outside the en-                                            closure.                                           They do not, themselves, represent a hazard or potential hazard.                                           The prescribed minimum clearance from the danger zone is maintained.                                      Safety gates (maintenance gates) must meet the following requirements:                                           They are reduced to an absolute minimum.                                           The interlocks (e.g. safety gate switches) are linked to the operator safety                                            input of the robot controller via safety gate switching devices or safety                                            PLC.                                           Switching devices, switches and the type of switching conform to the re-                                            quirements of Performance Level d and category 3 according to EN ISO                                            13849-1.                                           Depending on the risk situation: the safety gate is additionally safeguarded                                            by means of a locking mechanism that only allows the gate to be opened                                            if the manipulator is safely at a standstill.                                           The button for acknowledging the safety gate is located outside the space                                            limited by the safeguards.  Further information is contained in the corresponding standards and                                                regulations. These also include EN 953.   Other safety              Other safety equipment must be integrated into the system in accordance with            equipment                 the corresponding standards and regulations.   4.7       Overview of operating modes and safety functions  The following table indicates the operating modes in which the safety functions                                      are active.  Safety functions                    T1          T2          AUT        AUT EXT                                          Operator safety                      -           -         Active        Active                                          EMERGENCY STOP device            Active       Active       Active        Active                                          Enabling device                  Active       Active          -             -                                          Reduced velocity during pro-                                                                            Active         -            -             -                                          gram verification                                          Jog mode                         Active       Active          -             -                                          Software limit switches          Active       Active       Active        Active   4.8       Safety measures  4.8.1     General safety measures  The industrial robot may only be used in perfect technical condition in accor-                                      dance with its intended use and only by safety-conscious persons. Operator                                      errors can result in personal injury and damage to property.                                      It is important to be prepared for possible movements of the industrial robot                                      even after the robot controller has been switched off and locked out. Incorrect   48 / 205                                                                Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     4 Safety   installation (e.g. overload) or mechanical defects (e.g. brake defect) can cause                          the manipulator or external axes to sag. If work is to be carried out on a                          switched-off industrial robot, the manipulator and external axes must first be                          moved into a position in which they are unable to move on their own, whether                          the payload is mounted or not. If this is not possible, the manipulator and ex-                          ternal axes must be secured by appropriate means.  In the absence of operational safety functions and safe-                                                guards, the industrial robot can cause personal injury or                           material damage. If safety functions or safeguards are dismantled or deacti-                           vated, the industrial robot may not be operated.  Standing underneath the robot arm can cause death or                                                  injuries. For this reason, standing underneath the robot                           arm is prohibited!  The motors reach temperatures during operation which                                               can cause burns to the skin. Contact must be avoided.                           Appropriate safety precautions must be taken, e.g. protective gloves must be                           worn.  smartPAD                 The user must ensure that the industrial robot is only operated with the smart-                          PAD by authorized persons.                          If more than one smartPAD is used in the overall system, it must be ensured                          that each smartPAD is unambiguously assigned to the corresponding indus-                          trial robot. They must not be interchanged.  The operator must ensure that decoupled smartPADs                                               are immediately removed from the system and stored out                           of sight and reach of personnel working on the industrial robot. This serves                           to prevent operational and non-operational EMERGENCY STOP devices                           from becoming interchanged.                           Failure to observe this precaution may result in death, severe injuries or con-                           siderable damage to property.  Modifications            After modifications to the industrial robot, checks must be carried out to ensure                          the required safety level. The valid national or regional work safety regulations                          must be observed for this check. The correct functioning of all safety functions                          must also be tested.                          New or modified programs must always be tested first in Manual Reduced Ve-                          locity mode (T1).                          After modifications to the industrial robot, existing programs must always be                          tested first in Manual Reduced Velocity mode (T1). This applies to all compo-                          nents of the industrial robot and includes modifications to the software and                          configuration settings.  Faults                   The following tasks must be carried out in the case of faults in the industrial                          robot:                              Switch off the robot controller and secure it (e.g. with a padlock) to prevent                               unauthorized persons from switching it on again.                              Indicate the fault by means of a label with a corresponding warning (tag-                               out).                              Keep a record of the faults.                              Eliminate the fault and carry out a function test.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          49 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   4.8.2     Transportation  Manipulator               The prescribed transport position of the manipulator must be observed. Trans-                                      portation must be carried out in accordance with the operating instructions or                                      assembly instructions of the robot.                                      Avoid vibrations and impacts during transportation in order to prevent damage                                      to the manipulator.  Robot controller          The prescribed transport position of the robot controller must be observed.                                      Transportation must be carried out in accordance with the operating instruc-                                      tions or assembly instructions of the robot controller.                                      Avoid vibrations and impacts during transportation in order to prevent damage                                      to the robot controller.  External axis             The prescribed transport position of the external axis (e.g. KUKA linear unit,            (optional)                turn-tilt table, positioner) must be observed. Transportation must be carried                                      out in accordance with the operating instructions or assembly instructions of                                      the external axis.   4.8.3     Start-up and recommissioning  Before starting up systems and devices for the first time, a check must be car-                                      ried out to ensure that the systems and devices are complete and operational,                                      that they can be operated safely and that any damage is detected.                                      The valid national or regional work safety regulations must be observed for this                                      check. The correct functioning of all safety functions must also be tested.  The passwords for the user groups must be changed in the KUKA                                              System Software before start-up. The passwords must only be com-                                              municated to authorized personnel.  The robot controller is preconfigured for the specific in-                                                           dustrial robot. If cables are interchanged, the manipula-                                      tor and the external axes (optional) may receive incorrect data and can thus                                      cause personal injury or material damage. If a system consists of more than                                      one manipulator, always connect the connecting cables to the manipulators                                      and their corresponding robot controllers.  If additional components (e.g. cables), which are not part of the scope                                             of supply of KUKA Roboter GmbH, are integrated into the industrial                                             robot, the user is responsible for ensuring that these components do                                      not adversely affect or disable safety functions.  If the internal cabinet temperature of the robot controller                                                          differs greatly from the ambient temperature, condensa-                                      tion can form, which may cause damage to the electrical components. Do not                                      put the robot controller into operation until the internal temperature of the                                      cabinet has adjusted to the ambient temperature.  Function test             The following tests must be carried out before start-up and recommissioning:                                      General test:                                      It must be ensured that:                                         The industrial robot is correctly installed and fastened in accordance with                                          the specifications in the documentation.     50 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     4 Safety       There is no damage to the robot that could be attributed to external forces.                               Examples: Dents or abrasion that could be caused by an impact or colli-                               sion.  In the case of such damage, the affected components                                                must be exchanged. In particular, the motor and counter-                           balancing system must be checked carefully.                           External forces can cause non-visible damage. For example, it can lead to                           a gradual loss of drive power from the motor, resulting in unintended move-                           ments of the manipulator. Death, injuries or considerable damage to property                           may otherwise result.      There are no foreign bodies or loose parts on the industrial robot.                              All required safety equipment is correctly installed and operational.                              The power supply ratings of the industrial robot correspond to the local                               supply voltage and mains type.                              The ground conductor and the equipotential bonding cable are sufficiently                               rated and correctly connected.                              The connecting cables are correctly connected and the connectors are                               locked.                          Test of the safety functions:                          A function test must be carried out for the following safety functions to ensure                          that they are functioning correctly:                              Local EMERGENCY STOP device                              External EMERGENCY STOP device (input and output)                              Enabling device (in the test modes)                              Operator safety                              All other safety-relevant inputs and outputs used                              Other external safety functions   4.8.3.1   Checking machine data and safety configuration   The industrial robot must not be moved if incorrect ma-                                               chine data or an incorrect controller configuration are                           loaded. Death, severe injuries or considerable damage to property may oth-                           erwise result. The correct data must be loaded.      It must be ensured that the rating plate on the robot controller has the                               same machine data as those entered in the declaration of incorporation.                               The machine data on the rating plate of the manipulator and the external                               axes (optional) must be entered during start-up.                              The practical tests for the machine data must be carried out within the                               scope of the start-up procedure.                              Following modifications to the machine data, the safety configuration must                               be checked.                              After activation of a WorkVisual project on the robot controller, the safety                               configuration must be checked!                              If machine data are adopted when checking the safety configuration (re-                               gardless of the reason for the safety configuration check), the practical                               tests for the machine data must be carried out.                              System Software 8.3 or higher: If the checksum of the safety configuration                               has changed, the safe axis monitoring functions must be checked.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          51 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Information about checking the safety configuration and the safe axis                                               monitoring functions is contained in the Operating and Programming                                               Instructions for System Integrators.  If the practical tests are not successfully completed in the initial start-up, KUKA                                     Roboter GmbH must be contacted.                                     If the practical tests are not successfully completed during a different proce-                                     dure, the machine data and the safety-relevant controller configuration must                                     be checked and corrected.                                     General practical test:                                     If practical tests are required for the machine data, this test must always be                                     carried out.                                     The following methods are available for performing the practical test:                                          TCP calibration with the XYZ 4-point method                                           The practical test is passed if the TCP has been successfully calibrated.                                     or:                                     1. Align the TCP with a freely selected point.                                           The point serves as a reference point. It must be located so that reorien-                                           tation is possible.                                     2. Move the TCP manually at least 45° once in each of the A, B and C direc-                                        tions.                                           The movements do not have to be accumulative, i.e. after motion in one                                           direction it is possible to return to the original position before moving in the                                           next direction.                                           The practical test is passed if the TCP does not deviate from the reference                                           point by more than 2 cm in total.                                     Practical test for axes that are not mathematically coupled:                                     If practical tests are required for the machine data, this test must be carried out                                     when axes are present that are not mathematically coupled.                                     1. Mark the starting position of the axis that is not mathematically coupled.                                     2. Move the axis manually by a freely selected path length. Determine the                                        path length from the display Actual position on the smartHMI.                                              Move linear axes a specific distance.                                              Move rotational axes through a specific angle.                                     3. Measure the length of the path covered and compare it with the value dis-                                        played on the smartHMI.                                           The practical test is passed if the values differ by no more than 10%.                                     4. Repeat the test for each axis that is not mathematically coupled.                                     Practical test for couplable axes:                                     If practical tests are required for the machine data, this test must be carried out                                     when axes are present that can be physically coupled and uncoupled, e.g. a                                     servo gun.                                     1. Physically uncouple the couplable axis.                                     2. Move all the remaining axes individually.                                           The practical test is passed if it has been possible to move all the remain-                                           ing axes.     52 / 205                                                                Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     4 Safety   4.8.3.2   Start-up mode  Description              The industrial robot can be set to Start-up mode via the smartHMI user inter-                          face. In this mode, the manipulator can be moved in T1 without the external                          safeguards being put into operation.                          When Start-up mode is possible depends on the safety interface that is used.                          Discrete safety interface                              System Software 8.2 or earlier:                               Start-up mode is always possible if all input signals at the discrete safety                               interface have the state “logic zero”. If this is not the case, the robot con-                               troller prevents or terminates Start-up mode.                               If an additional discrete safety interface for safety options is used, the in-                               puts there must also have the state “logic zero”.                              System Software 8.3 or higher:                               Start-up mode is always possible. This also means that it is independent                               of the state of the inputs at the discrete safety interface.                               If an additional discrete safety interface is used for safety options: The                               states of these inputs are also irrelevant.                          Ethernet safety interface                          The robot controller prevents or terminates Start-up mode if a connection to a                          higher-level safety system exists or is established.  Effect                   When the Start-up mode is activated, all outputs are automatically set to the                          state “logic zero”.                          If the robot controller has a peripheral contactor (US2), and if the safety con-                          figuration specifies for this to switch in accordance with the motion enable,                          then the same also applies in Start-up mode. This means that if motion enable                          is present, the US2 voltage is switched on – even in Start-up mode.  Hazards                  Possible hazards and risks involved in using Start-up mode:                              A person walks into the manipulator’s danger zone.                              In a hazardous situation, a disabled external EMERGENCY STOP device                               is actuated and the manipulator is not shut down.                          Additional measures for avoiding risks in Start-up mode:                              Cover disabled EMERGENCY STOP devices or attach a warning sign in-                               dicating that the EMERGENCY STOP device is out of operation.                              If there is no safety fence, other measures must be taken to prevent per-                               sons from entering the manipulator’s danger zone, e.g. use of warning                               tape.  Use                      Intended use of Start-up mode:                              Start-up in T1 mode when the external safeguards have not yet been in-                               stalled or put into operation. The danger zone must be delimited at least                               by means of warning tape.                              Fault localization (periphery fault).                              Use of Start-up mode must be minimized as much as possible.  Use of Start-up mode disables all external safeguards.                                                The service personnel are responsible for ensuring that                           there is no-one in or near the danger zone of the manipulator as long as the                           safeguards are disabled.                           Failure to observe this precaution may result in death, injuries or damage to                           property.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          53 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Misuse                    Any use or application deviating from the intended use is deemed to be misuse                                      and is not allowed. KUKA Roboter GmbH is not liable for any damage resulting                                      from such misuse. The risk lies entirely with the user.   4.8.4     Manual mode  Manual mode is the mode for setup work. Setup work is all the tasks that have                                      to be carried out on the industrial robot to enable automatic operation. Setup                                      work includes:                                         Jog mode                                         Teaching                                         Programming                                         Program verification                                      The following must be taken into consideration in manual mode:                                         New or modified programs must always be tested first in Manual Reduced                                          Velocity mode (T1).                                         The manipulator, tooling or external axes (optional) must never touch or                                          project beyond the safety fence.                                         Workpieces, tooling and other objects must not become jammed as a re-                                          sult of the industrial robot motion, nor must they lead to short-circuits or be                                          liable to fall off.                                         All setup work must be carried out, where possible, from outside the safe-                                          guarded area.                                      If the setup work has to be carried out inside the safeguarded area, the follow-                                      ing must be taken into consideration:                                      In Manual Reduced Velocity mode (T1):                                         If it can be avoided, there must be no other persons inside the safeguard-                                          ed area.                                          If it is necessary for there to be several persons inside the safeguarded ar-                                          ea, the following must be observed:                                             Each person must have an enabling device.                                             All persons must have an unimpeded view of the industrial robot.                                             Eye-contact between all persons must be possible at all times.                                         The operator must be so positioned that he can see into the danger area                                          and get out of harm’s way.                                      In Manual High Velocity mode (T2):                                         This mode may only be used if the application requires a test at a velocity                                          higher than that possible in T1 mode.                                         Teaching and programming are not permissible in this operating mode.                                         Before commencing the test, the operator must ensure that the enabling                                          devices are operational.                                         The operator must be positioned outside the danger zone.                                         There must be no other persons inside the safeguarded area. It is the re-                                          sponsibility of the operator to ensure this.   4.8.5     Simulation  Simulation programs do not correspond exactly to reality. Robot programs cre-                                      ated in simulation programs must be tested in the system in Manual Reduced                                      Velocity mode (T1). It may be necessary to modify the program.     54 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                      4 Safety   4.8.6     Automatic mode  Automatic mode is only permissible in compliance with the following safety                          measures:                              All safety equipment and safeguards are present and operational.                              There are no persons in the system.                              The defined working procedures are adhered to.                          If the manipulator or an external axis (optional) comes to a standstill for no ap-                          parent reason, the danger zone must not be entered until an EMERGENCY                          STOP has been triggered.   4.8.7     Maintenance and repair  After maintenance and repair work, checks must be carried out to ensure the                          required safety level. The valid national or regional work safety regulations                          must be observed for this check. The correct functioning of all safety functions                          must also be tested.                          The purpose of maintenance and repair work is to ensure that the system is                          kept operational or, in the event of a fault, to return the system to an operation-                          al state. Repair work includes troubleshooting in addition to the actual repair                          itself.                          The following safety measures must be carried out when working on the indus-                          trial robot:                              Carry out work outside the danger zone. If work inside the danger zone is                               necessary, the user must define additional safety measures to ensure the                               safe protection of personnel.                              Switch off the industrial robot and secure it (e.g. with a padlock) to prevent                               it from being switched on again. If it is necessary to carry out work with the                               robot controller switched on, the user must define additional safety mea-                               sures to ensure the safe protection of personnel.                              If it is necessary to carry out work with the robot controller switched on, this                               may only be done in operating mode T1.                              Label the system with a sign indicating that work is in progress. This sign                               must remain in place, even during temporary interruptions to the work.                              The EMERGENCY STOP devices must remain active. If safety functions                               or safeguards are deactivated during maintenance or repair work, they                               must be reactivated immediately after the work is completed.  Before work is commenced on live parts of the robot sys-                                                  tem, the main switch must be turned off and secured                           against being switched on again. The system must then be checked to en-                           sure that it is deenergized.                           It is not sufficient, before commencing work on live parts, to execute an                           EMERGENCY STOP or a safety stop, or to switch off the drives, as this does                           not disconnect the robot system from the mains power supply. Parts remain                           energized. Death or severe injuries may result.  Faulty components must be replaced using new components with the same                          article numbers or equivalent components approved by KUKA Roboter GmbH                          for this purpose.                          Cleaning and preventive maintenance work is to be carried out in accordance                          with the operating instructions.  Robot controller         Even when the robot controller is switched off, parts connected to peripheral                          devices may still carry voltage. The external power sources must therefore be                          switched off if work is to be carried out on the robot controller.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            55 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   The ESD regulations must be adhered to when working on components in the                                      robot controller.                                      Voltages in excess of 50 V (up to 780 V) can be present in various components                                      for several minutes after the robot controller has been switched off! To prevent                                      life-threatening injuries, no work may be carried out on the industrial robot in                                      this time.                                      Water and dust must be prevented from entering the robot controller.  Counterbal-               Some robot variants are equipped with a hydropneumatic, spring or gas cylin-            ancing system             der counterbalancing system.                                      The hydropneumatic and gas cylinder counterbalancing systems are pressure                                      equipment and, as such, are subject to obligatory equipment monitoring and                                      the provisions of the Pressure Equipment Directive.                                      The user must comply with the applicable national laws, regulations and stan-                                      dards pertaining to pressure equipment.                                      Inspection intervals in Germany in accordance with Industrial Safety Order,                                      Sections 14 and 15. Inspection by the user before commissioning at the instal-                                      lation site.                                      The following safety measures must be carried out when working on the coun-                                      terbalancing system:                                         The manipulator assemblies supported by the counterbalancing systems                                          must be secured.                                         Work on the counterbalancing systems must only be carried out by quali-                                          fied personnel.  Hazardous                 The following safety measures must be carried out when handling hazardous            substances                substances:                                         Avoid prolonged and repeated intensive contact with the skin.                                         Avoid breathing in oil spray or vapors.                                         Clean skin and apply skin cream.  To ensure safe use of our products, we recommend regularly re-                                              questing up-to-date safety data sheets for hazardous substances.    4.8.8     Decommissioning, storage and disposal  The industrial robot must be decommissioned, stored and disposed of in ac-                                      cordance with the applicable national laws, regulations and standards.   4.8.9     Safety measures for “single point of control”  Overview                  If certain components in the industrial robot are operated, safety measures                                      must be taken to ensure complete implementation of the principle of “single                                      point of control” (SPOC).                                      The relevant components are:                                         Submit interpreter                                         PLC                                         OPC server                                         Remote control tools                                         Tools for configuration of bus systems with online functionality                                         KUKA.RobotSensorInterface    56 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     4 Safety    The implementation of additional safety measures may be required.                                    This must be clarified for each specific application; this is the respon-                                    sibility of the system integrator, programmer or user of the system.  Since only the system integrator knows the safe states of actuators in the pe-                          riphery of the robot controller, it is his task to set these actuators to a safe                          state, e.g. in the event of an EMERGENCY STOP.  T1, T2                   In modes T1 and T2, the components referred to above may only access the                          industrial robot if the following signals have the following states:  Signal                                  State required for SPOC                              $USER_SAF                               TRUE                              $SPOC_MOTION_ENABLE                     TRUE  Submit inter-            If motions, (e.g. drives or grippers) are controlled with the submit interpreter or preter, PLC              the PLC via the I/O system, and if they are not safeguarded by other means,                          then this control will take effect even in T1 and T2 modes or while an EMER-                          GENCY STOP is active.                          If variables that affect the robot motion (e.g. override) are modified with the                          submit interpreter or the PLC, this takes effect even in T1 and T2 modes or                          while an EMERGENCY STOP is active.                          Safety measures:                               In T1 and T2, the system variable $OV_PRO must not be written to by the                                submit interpreter or the PLC.                               Do not modify safety-relevant signals and variables (e.g. operating mode,                                EMERGENCY STOP, safety gate contact) via the submit interpreter or                                PLC.                                If modifications are nonetheless required, all safety-relevant signals and                                variables must be linked in such a way that they cannot be set to a dan-                                gerous state by the submit interpreter or PLC. This is the responsibility of                                the system integrator.  OPC server,              These components can be used with write access to modify programs, outputs remote control           or other parameters of the robot controller, without this being noticed by any tools                    persons located inside the system.                          Safety measure:                          If these components are used, outputs that could cause a hazard must be de-                          termined in a risk assessment. These outputs must be designed in such a way                          that they cannot be set without being enabled. This can be done using an ex-                          ternal enabling device, for example.  Tools for configu-       If these components have an online functionality, they can be used with write ration of bus            access to modify programs, outputs or other parameters of the robot control- systems                  ler, without this being noticed by any persons located inside the system.                               WorkVisual from KUKA                               Tools from other manufacturers                          Safety measure:                          In the test modes, programs, outputs or other parameters of the robot control-                          ler must not be modified using these components.   4.9       Applied norms and regulations  Name                        Definition                                                            Edition   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          57 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   2006/42/EC               Machinery Directive:                                                         2006                                     Directive 2006/42/EC of the European Parliament and of the                                     Council of 17 May 2006 on machinery, and amending Direc-                                     tive 95/16/EC (recast)  2014/30/EU               EMC Directive:                                                               2014                                     Directive 2014/30/EC of the European Parliament and of the                                     Council of 26 February 2014 on the approximation of the laws                                     of the Member States concerning electromagnetic compatibil-                                     ity  2014/68/EC               Pressure Equipment Directive:                                                2014                                     Directive 2014/68/EC of the European Parliament and of the                                     Council of 15 May 2014 on the approximation of the laws of                                     the Member States concerning pressure equipment                                     (Only applicable for robots with hydropneumatic counterbal-                                     ancing system.)                                     This directive is valid from the 19/07/2016 on.  97/23/EC                 Pressure Equipment Directive:                                                1997                                     Directive 97/23/EC of the European Parliament and of the                                     Council of 29 May 1997 on the approximation of the laws of                                     the Member States concerning pressure equipment                                     (Only applicable for robots with hydropneumatic counterbal-                                     ancing system.)                                     This directive is valid until 18/07/2016.  EN ISO 13850             Safety of machinery:                                                         2008                                     Emergency stop - Principles for design  EN ISO 13849-1           Safety of machinery:                                                         2008                                     Safety-related parts of control systems - Part 1: General prin-                                     ciples of design  EN ISO 13849-2           Safety of machinery:                                                         2012                                     Safety-related parts of control systems - Part 2: Validation  EN ISO 12100             Safety of machinery:                                                         2010                                     General principles of design, risk assessment and risk reduc-                                     tion  EN ISO 10218-1           Industrial robots – Safety requirements                                      2011                                     Part 1: Robot                                     Note: Content equivalent to ANSI/RIA R.15.06-2012, Part 1  EN 614-1 + A1            Safety of machinery:                                                         2009                                     Ergonomic design principles - Part 1: Terms and general prin-                                     ciples     58 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                            4 Safety   EN 61000-6-2               Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC):                             2005                            Part 6-2: Generic standards; Immunity for industrial environ-                            ments  EN 61000-6-4 + A1          Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC):                             2011                            Part 6-4: Generic standards; Emission standard for industrial                            environments  EN 60204-1 + A1            Safety of machinery:                                             2009                            Electrical equipment of machines - Part 1: General require-                            ments     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                  59 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     60 / 205                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     5 Installation   5            Installation s  t     5.1          System requirements t     Hardware                        KR C4 or KR C4 compact                                 Reference switch module  Software                        KUKA System Software 8.3                             With a KR C4 compact, PROFIsafe or CIP Safety is always required for the                             purpose of connecting a reference switch.                                 KR C4 PROFINET 3.0 for connection via PROFIsafe                                 KR C4 EtherNet/IP 2.0 for connection via CIP Safety  Compatibility                   KUKA.SafeOperation must not be installed on a robot controller together                                  with other safety options:                                     KUKA.SafeRangeMonitoring                                     KUKA.SafeSingleBrake   5.2          Installing or updating SafeOperation  It is advisable to archive all relevant data before updating a software                                       package.   Precondition                    “Expert” user group                                 T1 or T2 mode                                 No program is selected.                                 USB stick with the software to be installed                                     ZIP files must be unzipped.                                     There must be no other files in the directory in which the individual files                                      are located.  We recommend using a KUKA USB stick. Data may be                                                     lost if a stick from a different manufacturer is used.  Procedure                   1. Connect the USB stick to the robot controller or smartPAD.                             2. In the main menu, select Start-up > Additional software.                             3. Press New software: The entry SafeOperation must be displayed in the                                Name column and drive E:\ or K:\ in the Path column.                                  If not, press Refresh.                             4. If the specified entries are now displayed, continue with step 5.                                  Otherwise, the path from which the software is to be installed must be con-                                  figured first:                                  a. Press the Configure button.                                  b. Select a line in the Installation paths for options area.                                      Note: If the line already contains a path, this path will be overwritten.                                  c. Press Path selection. The available drives are displayed.                                  d. If the stick is connected to the robot controller: On E:\, select the direc-                                     tory in which the software is located.                                      If the stick is connected to the smartPAD: K:\ instead of E:\                                  e. Press Save. The Installation paths for options area is displayed                                     again. It now contains the new path.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             61 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   f.   Mark the line with the new path and press Save again.                                      5. Mark the entry SafeOperation and click on Install. Answer the request for                                         confirmation with Yes.                                      6. Confirm the reboot prompt with OK.                                      7. Remove the stick.                                      8. Reboot the robot controller.  LOG file                  A LOG file is created under C:\KRC\ROBOTER\LOG.   5.3        Uninstalling SafeOperation  It is advisable to archive all relevant data before uninstalling a soft-                                               ware package.   Precondition                 “Expert” user group                                         T1 or T2 mode                                         Safe monitoring has been deactivated.  If the safe monitoring is not deactivated before uninstallation, the                                             safety configuration remains active after the software has been unin-                                             stalled.                                       (>>> 7.12 "Deactivating safe monitoring" Page 123)  Procedure                 1. In the main menu, select Start-up > Additional software.                                      2. Mark the entry SafeOperation and click on Uninstall. Reply to the request                                         for confirmation with Yes. Uninstallation is prepared.                                      3. Reboot the robot controller. Uninstallation is resumed and completed.  LOG file                  A LOG file is created under C:\KRC\ROBOTER\LOG.     62 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                    6 Operation   6            Operation  6.1          User groups t     Different functions are available in the KSS, depending on the user group. The                             following user groups are relevant for the safety configuration of the robot:                                 Safety recovery                                  This user can activate an existing safety configuration of the robot using                                  an activation code. If no safety option is installed, the safety recovery per-                                  sonnel have more extensive rights. In this case he is authorized, for exam-                                  ple, to configure the standard safety functions.                                  This user group is protected by means of a password.                                 Safety maintenance                                  User group for the start-up technician. This user can edit the safety config-                                  uration and make safety-relevant changes.                                  This user group is protected by means of a password.                             The safety maintenance technician must be specially trained in the configura-                             tion of safety functions. For this, we recommend training courses at KUKA Col-                             lege. Information about the training program can be found at www.kuka.com                             or can be obtained directly from our subsidiaries.  The password for the “Safety Maintenance” and “Safety Recovery”                                       user groups must be changed before start-up and must only be com-                                       municated to authorized personnel.   6.2          Opening the safety configuration  Procedure                   1. Select Configuration > Safety configuration in the main menu.                             2. The safety configuration checks whether there are any relevant deviations                                between the data in the robot controller and those in the safety controller.                                     If there are no deviations, the Safety configuration window is                                      opened.                                     If there are deviations, the Troubleshooting wizard window is                                      opened. A description of the problem and a list of possible causes is                                      displayed. The user can select the applicable cause. The wizard then                                      suggests a solution.  Further information about checking the safety configuration is con-                                       tained in the Operating and Programming Instructions for System In-                                       tegrators.   6.3          Overview of buttons  The following buttons are available:  Button                                Description     Reset all to defaults                 Resets all parameters of the safety configuration to the default                                           values.     Revert changes                        Resets all changes since the last time the configuration was                                           saved.     Change log                            The log of changes to the safety configuration is displayed.     View                                  The safety-relevant machine data are displayed.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          63 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Button                               Description             Properties                           The properties of a monitoring space or safe tool can be                                                  defined.             Export                               Parts of the safety configuration can be exported into an XML                                                  file (XML export).             Import                               Parts of the safety configuration can be imported as an XML file                                                  (XML export).             Communication parameters             The safety ID of the PROFINET device can be changed.                                                  Note: Further information is contained in the Operating and                                                  Programming Instructions for System Integrators.             Global parameters                    The global parameters of the safety configuration can be                                                  defined.             Hardware options                     The hardware settings can be defined.                                                  Note: Further information is contained in the Operating and                                                  Programming Instructions for System Integrators.             Check machine data                   It is possible to check whether the machine data of the safety                                                  configuration are up to date.             Safe operational stop                The safe operational stop can be defined.             Save                                 Saves and activates the safety configuration for the robot.             Touch-up                             Saves the current robot position as a corner of a cell area.                                                  OR                                                  Saves the current axis angle as the lower limit or upper limit of                                                  the axis-specific monitoring space.             Touch-up reference position          Saves the current robot flange position or the position of the             for group                            axes of a reference group as a reference position.             Cell configuration                   The cell area can be defined.             Back                                 Back to the tab   6.4       Display functions  6.4.1     Displaying information about the safety configuration  Procedure                    In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                          The safety configuration opens with the General tab.  Description               The General tab contains the following information:  Parameter                            Description             Robot                                Serial number of the robot             Safety controller                        Installed safety option version                                                      Safety controller version (internal)             Parameter data set                       Checksum of the safety configuration                                                      Time stamp of the safety configuration (date and time last                                                       saved)                                                      Safety configuration version                                                      Activation code of the safety configuration             Machine data                         Time stamp of the safety-relevant machine data (date and time                                                  last saved)     64 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                   6 Operation   Parameter                             Description  Brake test                                State of brake test (activated, deactivated or forced)                                            Checksum of the brake test configuration  Current configuration                     Name of the safety interface                                            State of Cartesian monitoring (= velocity monitoring in T1)                                             (activated or deactivated)                                            State of safe monitoring (activated or deactivated)                                            Number of velocity-monitored axes                                            Number of monitoring spaces                                            Number of protected spaces                                            Number of safe tools   6.4.2     Displaying the change log  Every modification to the safety configuration and every saving operation is                          automatically logged. The log can be displayed.  Procedure                    In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                               The Safety configuration window opens.                              Press Change log.   6.4.3     Displaying machine data  The safety-relevant machine data can be displayed.  Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                               The Safety configuration window opens.                          2. Press View.   6.5       Importing the safety configuration (XML import)  Description              Parts of the safety configuration can be imported as an XML file. The import-                          able parameters depend on the installed safety option:  SafeOperation             SafeRangeMonitoring          SafeSingleBrake  Cell configuration  Cartesian monitoring  spaces  Axis-specific monitor-  ing spaces  Tools  Global parameters  In order to generate an XML file for importing, the user has the following op-                          tions:                              Export the current safety configuration of the robot controller to an XML file                               and edit it. In this way it is possible to ensure that the format of the XML                               file is correct for a subsequent import.                               (>>> 6.6 "Exporting the safety configuration (XML export)" Page 67)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           65 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2      Generate the XML file on the basis of the XML schema C:\KRC\SmartH-                                          MI\Schemes\SafetyConfigImport.xsd, e.g. using a script programmed by                                          the user.                                      The following points must be observed when editing the XML files:                                         The XML schema defines the structure of the XML file for the import. For                                          individual parameters, the XML schema allows higher values than the in-                                          stalled version of the safety option.                                         The XML file to be imported should only contain parameters and values                                          which are supported by the current safety option. If this is not the case, it                                          can prevent the XML import from occurring.  It is also possible to import safety configurations in WorkVisual. Infor-                                               mation about this can be found in the WorkVisual documentation.   Precondition                 Safety option is installed.                                         User group “Safety maintenance”                                         T1 or T2 mode                                         No program is selected.  Procedure                 1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                          The Safety configuration window opens.                                      2. Press Import. The available drives are displayed.                                      3. Navigate to the directory where the XML file to be imported is located.                                      4. Select the XML file and press Next.                                          The parameters configured in the XML file are compared with the current                                          parameters of the safety configuration.                                      5. If notification, warning or error messages occur, these are displayed in the                                         Safety configuration window.                                          To continue with the XML import, press Next.                                          The Next button is deactivated in the event of error messages. Analyze er-                                          rors and cancel the XML import.                                              Rectify the error in the XML file and repeat the XML import.                                              OR: Select the correct XML file and repeat the XML import.                                      6. A tree view provides an overview of the parameters to be imported.                                          By default, only those nodes which contain changes to the current safety                                          configuration are expanded in the tree view. The parameters which are                                          changed by the XML import are displayed in blue text.                                      7. Check the parameters.                                          If not all of the required safety functions are configured correctly, or if the                                          wrong XML file was selected, cancel the XML import.                                              Rectify the error in the XML file and repeat the XML import.                                              OR: Select the correct XML file and repeat the XML import.                                      8. Press Import. The safety configuration is imported.                                      9. Save the safety configuration.                                          (>>> 7.5.10 "Saving the safety configuration" Page 97)                                      10. If plausibility errors are detected while saving, the user is informed of this                                          by a dialog. Close the dialog with OK.                                      11. Rectify errors directly in the safety configuration and save the safety con-                                          figuration.                                          OR                                          Rectify the error in the XML file, repeat the XML import and save the safety                                          configuration.   66 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                  6 Operation    Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                    must be carried out. (>>> 7.9 "Safety acceptance overview"                                    Page 117)  Overview                 The display with the overview of the parameters to be imported has the follow-                          ing columns:  Column                     Description                              Parameter name             Name of the parameter in the Safety configura-                                                         tion window                              Result                     Value of the parameter following import of the                                                         safety configuration                              Current                    Value of the parameter in the current safety con-                                                         figuration                              Imported                   Value of the parameter in the XML file to be                                                         imported                                                         The column is hidden when the display opens.  The following buttons are available for changing the display:  Button                     Description                              Display import col-        Displays or hides the Imported column.                              umn                                                         Check box active: Column is displayed.                                                         Check box not active: Column is hidden.                              Collapse all               All nodes in the tree view are collapsed.                              Expand all                 All nodes in the tree view are expanded.                              Expand changes             Only those nodes which contain changes to the                                                         current safety configuration are expanded in the                                                         tree view.   6.6       Exporting the safety configuration (XML export)  Description              Parts of the safety configuration can be exported into an XML file:                               Cell configuration                               Monitoring spaces                               Tools                               Global parameters                          The XML file always contains all the parameters which are contained in the ex-                          ported parts of the safety configuration.                          Exporting is always possible, irrespective of whether a safety option is in-                          stalled or not. However, an export only makes sense if a safety option is in-                          stalled.                          The current safety configuration of the robot controller is exported. If the safety                          configuration contains unsaved changes, these are also exported.                          If invalid values are entered in the safety configuration, the export is aborted                          with an error message (plausibility error).  It is also possible to export safety configurations in WorkVisual. Infor-                                    mation about this can be found in the WorkVisual documentation.   Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          67 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   The Safety configuration window opens.                                      2. Press Export. The available drives are displayed.                                      3. Select the desired file path and press Export.                                          The safety configuration is saved in an XML file. The file name is generat-                                          ed automatically.   6.7       Safe robot retraction in case of space violation  Description               If the robot has violated a monitoring space, it is stopped by the safety control-                                      ler (precondition: function Stop at boundaries is active). The robot must be                                      moved out of the violated space in T1 mode.  After a “Stop at boundaries”, the robot can only be moved in T1 mode.                                              No other operating mode can be set until the robot has left the violat-                                              ed space.  If the space is violated in T2 or Automatic mode, only a status message is dis-                                      played. The status message indicates which space has been violated.                                      If the space is violated in T1 mode, the acknowledgement message Ackn.:                                      Stop because workspace exceeded is additionally displayed.  Precondition                 Operating mode T1  Procedure                 1. When the acknowledgement message is displayed, confirm it with OK.                                      2. Press and hold down the enabling switch.                                      3. Move the robot out of the violated space:                                             Using the jog keys (manual mode)                                             Using the Start and Start backwards keys (program mode)                                      The status message is cleared when the robot has left the violated space.     68 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                       7 Start-up and configuration   7            Start-up and configuration t     t     7.1          System safety instructions  During system planning, the safety functions must be planned. Re-                                    quired safety functions that are not implemented with the SafeOper-                                    ation safety option must be implemented using different safety                              measures.  The stopping distance when a monitoring function is triggered varies                                       according to the specific robot type. This aspect must be taken into                                       account by the system integrator during parameterization of the mon-                              itoring functions as part of the safety assessment.  Further information about the stopping distances and stopping times                                       can be found in the assembly or operating instructions of the relevant                                       robot.  Serious system errors, severe damage to the robot and                                                  injury or death can result from not carrying out the risk                              analysis. Risk analysis must be carried out before start-up and after any safe-                              ty-relevant modification.                                  Define axes that must be tested in the brake test.                                  Determine brake test cycle time.                                  Determine axis-specific and Cartesian limit values for the reduced veloc-                                   ity.                                  Define axis-specific and Cartesian monitoring spaces.                                  Define axes that must be configured for a safe operational stop.  Incorrect configuration of the safe monitoring functions                                                 may result in death or severe injuries and major damage                              to property. Consequently, safety options may not be operated until after                              safety acceptance has been carried out in accordance with the checklists.                              The checklists must be completed fully and confirmed in writing.                              (>>> 11.1 "Checklists" Page 171)  If safe monitoring is deactivated, the configured safety                                                     monitoring functions are inactive.  Serious injury and severe damage to the robot can be                                                 caused by changing the machine data. Modifying the                              machine data may deactivate monitoring functions. Machine data may only                              be modified by authorized personnel.   7.2          Jogging the robot without a higher-level safety controller  Description                 To jog the robot without a higher-level safety controller, Start-up mode must                             first be activated. The robot can then be jogged in T1 mode.                             Tool 1 is always active in Start-up mode. In Start-up mode, all monitoring func-                             tions of the safety configuration that can be activated via safe inputs are deac-                             tivated.                              (>>> 8.1.1 "SafeOperation via Ethernet safety interface (optional)" Page 129)                              (>>> 8.2 "SafeOperation via interface X13" Page 136)   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             69 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   The following monitoring functions remain active:                                          Monitoring of the cell area                                          Monitoring of global maximum Cartesian velocity                                          Monitoring of global maximum axis velocity                                          Workspace monitoring functions that are configured as always active                                          Monitoring of the workspace-specific velocity in workspaces that are con-                                           figured as always active                                          Velocity monitoring in T1  External safeguards are disabled in Start-up mode. Ob-                                                           serve the safety instructions relating to Start-up mode.                                       (>>> 4.8.3.2 "Start-up mode" Page 53)  Precondition                  Operating mode T1                                          If the Ethernet safety interface is used: No connection to a higher-level                                           safety controller  Procedure                     In the main menu, select Start-up > Service > Start-up mode.  Menu                                     Description                                                                                   Start-up mode is active. Touching                                                                                   the menu item deactivates the                                                                                   mode.                                                                                   Start-up mode is not active. Touch-                                                                                   ing the menu item activates the                                                                                   mode.   7.3       Start-up and configuration – overview  Step    Description                                            1      Set up brake test.                                                    (>>> 7.7 "Brake test" Page 106)                                            2      Install reference switch and actuating plate.                                                   (>>> 7.6.4.1 "Installing the reference switch and actuating                                                   plate" Page 101)                                            3      Connect the reference switch.                                                    (>>> 7.6.4.2 "Connecting a reference switch" Page 102)                                            4      Only if a safety PLC is being used: Configure the communica-                                                   tion via the interface.                                                    (>>> 8 "Interfaces to the higher-level controller" Page 125)                                            5      Master the robot.                                                   Note: Further information on mastering is contained in the oper-                                                   ating and programming instructions for the System Software.                                            6      Activate safe monitoring.                                                    (>>> 7.5.1 "Activating safe monitoring" Page 75)                                            7      Define global parameters.                                                      Mastering test input                                                      Cartesian velocity monitoring functions                                                    (>>> 7.5.2 "Defining global parameters" Page 75)     70 / 205                                                                Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                     7 Start-up and configuration   Step       Description                                8        Define monitoring spaces.                                         (>>> 7.5.3 "Defining a cell area" Page 77)                                         (>>> 7.5.4 "Defining Cartesian monitoring spaces" Page 79)                                         (>>> 7.5.5 "Defining axis-specific monitoring spaces" Page 84)                                9        Define axis-specific velocity monitoring.                                         (>>> 7.5.6 "Defining axis-specific velocity monitoring"                                         Page 87)                                         (>>> 7.5.7 "Defining the safe operational stop for axis groups"                                         Page 91)                               10        Define safe tools.                                         (>>> 7.5.8 "Defining safe tools" Page 93)                               11        Program mastering test.                                         (>>> 7.6.5 "Teaching positions for the mastering test"                                         Page 103)                               12        Define reference position.                                         (>>> 7.5.9 "Defining the reference position" Page 95)                               13        Only if the reference switch is actuated by a ferromagnetic part                                         of the tool or following a tool change: Check the accuracy of the                                         reference position.                                          (>>> 7.6.6 "Checking the reference position (actuation with                                         tool)" Page 105)                               14        Save safety configuration.                                         (>>> 7.5.10 "Saving the safety configuration" Page 97)                               15        Perform mastering test.                                         (>>> 7.6.7 "Performing a mastering test manually" Page 105)                               16        Carry out safety acceptance.                                         (>>> 7.9 "Safety acceptance overview" Page 117)                                          (>>> 7.10 "Checking that the safety functions are functioning                                         correctly" Page 118)                               17        Archive safety configuration.                                         Note: Further information on archiving is contained in the oper-                                         ating and programming instructions for the System Software.                               18        Only if a new safety configuration is activated: Compare the                                         checksum displayed when the safety configuration is archived                                         with the checksum documented in the checklist for safety func-                                         tions.                                         (>>> 7.11 "Activating a new safety configuration" Page 122)   7.4       Information about the safety configuration  Cartesian monitoring spaces are only monitored against                                               the spheres used to model the safe tool. Robot compo-                           nents situated outside the tool spheres are not monitored and a space viola-                           tion by these components is not detected. Cartesian monitoring spaces and                           tool spheres must therefore be designed and configured in such a manner                           that the unmonitored robot components do not pose any threat.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              71 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Minimum sphere            The sphere radius must not fall below the predefined minimum value. This ra-            radius                    dius is dependent on the global maximum Cartesian velocity.                                      The minimum sphere radius is calculated as follows:                                         rmin [mm] >= 0.5 * (maximum Cartesian velocity [mm/s] * 0.012 s)                                      The smallest possible radius is 10 mm. A radius smaller than 10 mm cannot                                      be configured, even if the calculation gives a smaller value.                                      If values that are too small are configured, a message is displayed when sav-                                      ing and the configuration is prevented from being saved.  Minimum                   The length, width and height of a protected space must not fall below the pre-            protected space           defined minimum value. This value depends on the global maximum Cartesian            dimensions                velocity and the radius of the smallest sphere of the safe tool.                                      The minimum space dimensions (= minimum length, width and height) are cal-                                      culated as follows:                                         amin [mm] ≥ 0.018 s * maximum Cartesian velocity [mm/s] − 2 * rsphere                                          [mm]                                      A precondition for a correct result is that the sphere radius has been config-                                      ured correctly. (>>> "Minimum sphere radius" Page 72)                                      The smallest permissible length, width and height is 10 mm. Values smaller                                      than 10 mm cannot be configured, even if the calculation gives a smaller val-                                      ue.                                      If values that are too small are configured, a message is displayed when sav-                                      ing and the configuration is prevented from being saved.   7.4.1     Safe definition of Cartesian protected spaces  Here, different constellations are covered which can cause a protected space                                      violation to not be detected:                                         Narrow protected spaces                                         Motion across corners  Narrow protected          With narrow protected spaces, there is a risk that the robot may be able to            spaces                    move through the protected space without the space violation being detected.                                      The risk is partially reduced by the specified minimum value for the sphere ra-                                      dius and space dimensions.                                      To further reduce the risk, the following rules must be observed in the config-                                      uration of protected spaces:                                         An area to be protected must always lie completely within a protected                                          space, i.e. be enclosed by the protected space.                                         Shielding an area to be protected using a narrow protected space (e.g. by                                          replicating a light curtain) is not permitted.                                         The stopping distances of the robot must also be taken into account when                                          defining a protected space. The protected space must overlap with the                                          area to be protected on all sides so that the robot can under no circum-                                          stances enter the area to be protected.     72 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                 7 Start-up and configuration     Fig. 7-1: Definition of protected space  1   Area to be protected                              2   Protected space shields the area to be protected (not allowed)                              3   Protected space encloses the entire area to be protected  Motion across            If a sphere is moved across the corner of a protected space at a high velocity, corners                  there is a risk of the space violation not being detected.                          To ensure that a signal is always reliably triggered on violation of an alarm                          space, this space must be made large enough to ensure that its full width,                          length or height is passed through.     Fig. 7-2: Protected space as an alarm space  1   Target area                              2   Sphere moves across corner of protected space (signal not triggered)                              3   Protected space is passed through completely (signal reliably trig-                                  gered)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          73 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   7.4.2     Unexpected protected space violation at space corners  At the corners of a Cartesian protected space, unexpected space violations                                      can occur even though the tool sphere is clearly outside the space boundary.                                      The following figure depicts the closest path along which a tool sphere can the-                                      oretically move about a Cartesian protected space. It can be moved along this                                      closest path and reoriented without violating the protected space.     Fig. 7-3: Path of a tool sphere along the space surface  1   Protected space                     3    Tool spheres reoriented                                         2   Tool spheres  The monitoring responds earlier than expected at the corners because of the                                      virtually expanded space boundaries. Depending on the radius of the tool                                      sphere, the protected space is expanded virtually on all sides (X, Y, Z) by pre-                                      cisely this radius.                                      As long as the tool sphere infringes the expanded space boundaries in only                                      one direction, the protected space is not violated. If, however, the expanded                                      protected space is infringed in 2 planes simultaneously, this is evaluated as a                                      space violation.     74 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration     Fig. 7-4: Protected space violation at space corners  1   Protected space                              2   Protected space expanded by the radius of the tool sphere                              3   Space violation in the X direction                              4   Space violation in the Y direction  In the figure, a simplified depiction is used. Only the space expansion in the                          directions X and Y is shown.   7.5       Configuring safety monitoring functions  7.5.1     Activating safe monitoring   Configuration of the safety monitoring functions is only possible if safe                                    monitoring has been activated.   Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. Open the safety configuration.                          2. Press Global parameters.                          3. Set the check mark at Safe monitoring.                          4. Save the safety configuration or continue configuration.   7.5.2     Defining global parameters  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              Operating mode T1 or T2                              A safety configuration is open.                              Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                    Press Global parameters and set parameters.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             75 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Description     Fig. 7-5: Defining global parameters  Defining global parameters:  Parameter                           Description             Safe monitoring                     Activation of safe monitoring                                                 Check box active: Safe monitoring is activated.                                                 Check box not active: Safe monitoring is not activated.                                                 Default: Safe monitoring not activated.             Mastering test input                at cabinet = reference switch is connected to the robot control-                                                 ler.                                                 via bus interface = reference switch is connected via Ethernet                                                 interface.                                                 Default: to control cabinet             Maximum Cartesian velocity          Limit value for global maximum Cartesian velocity (not space-                                                 dependent)                                                    0.5 … 30,000 mm/s                                                 Default: 10,000 mm/s     76 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                  7 Start-up and configuration   Parameter                             Description  Reduced Cartesian velocity            Limit value for safely reduced Cartesian velocity                                            0.5 … 30,000 mm/s                                        Default: 30,000 mm/s  Reduced Cartesian velocity            Limit value for safely reduced Cartesian velocity in T1 mode  T1                                            0.5 … 250 mm/s                                        Default: 250 mm/s   7.5.3     Defining a cell area  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              Operating mode T1 or T2                              A safety configuration is open.                              Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                1. Select the Monitoring spaces tab and press Cell configuration.                               The Cell configuration window opens.                          2. Enter the upper and lower bounds of the cell area.                          3. Select a corner from the list.                               The parameters of the corner are displayed.                          4. Activate the corner of the cell area if necessary. Set the check mark for the                             corner to do so.  Corners 1 to 4 are activated by default.   5. Move the robot to one corner of the cell area.                          6. Press Touch-up. The X and Y coordinates of the corner are saved.  The taught point refers to $WORLD and the tool $TOOL that is being                                    used.  7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to define further corners.  There must be at least 3 corners activated.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           77 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Description     Fig. 7-6: Defining a cell area  Defining a cell area:  Parameter                 Description                                       Reference system          Reference coordinate system                                                                      $WORLD                                       Z min                     Lower limit of the cell area                                                                      -100,000 mm … +100,000 mm                                                                 Default: -30,000 mm                                       Z max                     Upper limit of the cell area                                                                      -100,000 mm … +100,000 mm                                                                 Default: 30,000 mm     78 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration   Parameter                  Description                              Activated                  Check box active: Corner of cell area is acti-                                                         vated.                              (corner)                                                         Check box not active: Corner of cell area is not                                                         activated.                                                         Default corner 1 to 4: Activated                                                         Default corner 5 to 10: Not activated                              X, Y                       X, Y coordinate of corner 1 to 10 relative to the                                                         WORLD coordinate system                              (corner)                                                            -100,000 mm … +100,000 mm                                                         Default corner 1 or 4: +100,000 mm                                                         Default corner 2 or 3: -100,000 mm                                                         Default corner 5 to 10: 0 mm   7.5.4     Defining Cartesian monitoring spaces  Precondition                  User group “Safety maintenance”                               Operating mode T1 or T2                               A safety configuration is open.                               Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                1. Select the Monitoring spaces tab and select the monitoring space from                             the list.                                The parameters of the monitoring space are displayed.                          2. Enter the name of the monitoring space (max. 24 characters).                          3. Select the space type Cartesian space and set the parameters of the                             monitoring space.                          4. Press Properties.                                The Cartesian properties of {0} window is opened.                          5. Select the reference coordinate system and enter Cartesian positions.  Monitoring space     Fig. 7-7: Defining a Cartesian monitoring space  Defining a Cartesian monitoring space:     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             79 / 205            KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Parameter            Description                                     Type                 Type of monitoring space                                                          working space = The safe tool must move                                                          within the configured limits of the monitoring                                                          space. (Space violation if the safe tool leaves the                                                          monitoring space.)                                                          protected space = The safe tool must move                                                          outside the configured limits of the monitoring                                                          space. (Space violation if the safe tool enters the                                                          monitoring space.)                                                          Default: working space                                     Activation           Activation of monitoring space                                                          always off = monitoring space is not active.                                                          always active = monitoring space is always                                                          active.                                                          by input = monitoring space is activated by a                                                          safe input.                                                          If interface X13 is used, safe inputs are only                                                          available for monitoring spaces 12 … 16.                                                          (>>> 8.2 "SafeOperation via interface X13"                                                          Page 136)                                                          Default: always off                                     Space type           Type of monitoring space                                                          Cartesian space = Cartesian monitoring space                                                          Axis space = axis-specific monitoring space                                                          Default: Cartesian space                                     Stop at boundaries   A stop is triggered if the space is violated.                                                          Check box active: Robot stops if the monitoring                                                          space limits are exceeded.                                                          Check box not active: Robot does not stop if the                                                          monitoring space limits are exceeded.                                                          Default: Robot stops at boundaries.                                     V max                Limit value of the space-specific velocity                                                             0.5 … 30,000 mm/s                                                          Default: 30,000 mm/s     80 / 205                                                     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration   Parameter                    Description                           Vmax valid if                Validity of the space-specific velocity                                                        not used = space-specific velocity is not moni-                                                        tored.                                                        Space not violated = space-specific velocity is                                                        monitored if the monitoring space is not violated.                                                        Space violated = space-specific velocity is mon-                                                        itored if the monitoring space is violated.                                                        Default: Deactivated                           Stop if mastering test       Activation of reference stop                           not yet done                                                        Check box active: Reference stop is activated for                                                        the monitoring space.                                                        Check box not active: Reference stop is not acti-                                                        vated for the monitoring space.                                                        Default: Reference stop activated.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              81 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Properties     Fig. 7-8: Defining Cartesian properties  Defining properties:  Parameter                            Description             Reference system                     Reference coordinate system                                                     $WORLD                                                     $ROBROOT                                                  Default: $WORLD             Space dimensions                     Length, width and height of the monitoring space (display only)                                                  The length, width and height of a protected space must not fall                                                  below the predefined minimum value. This value depends on                                                  the global maximum Cartesian velocity and the radius of the                                                  smallest sphere of the safe tool.                                                  (>>> "Minimum protected space dimensions" Page 72)     82 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                 7 Start-up and configuration   Parameter                            Description  Origin X, Y, Z                       Offset of the origin of the Cartesian monitoring space in X, Y                                       and Z relative to the selected reference coordinate system.                                            -100,000 mm … +100,000 mm                                       Default: 0 mm  Origin A, B, C                       Orientation in A, B and C at the origin of the Cartesian monitor-                                       ing space relative to the selected reference coordinate system.                                       Origin A, C:                                           -180° … +180°                                       Origin B:                                           -90° … +90°                                       Default: 0°  Distance to origin                   Minimum X, Y and Z coordinates of the Cartesian monitoring                                       space relative to the origin  XMin, YMin, ZMin                                            -100,000 mm … +100,000 mm                                       Default: 0 mm  Distance to origin                   Maximum X, Y and Z coordinates of the Cartesian monitoring                                       space relative to the origin  XMax, YMax, ZMax                                            -100,000 mm … +100,000 mm                                       Default: 0 mm  Example                 The example shows a Cartesian monitoring space whose origin is offset in the                         X, Y and Z directions (yellow arrow) relative to the $ROBROOT system. The                         orientation A, B, C at the origin of the Cartesian monitoring space is identical                         to the orientation at the origin of $ROBROOT.     Fig. 7-9: Example of a Cartesian monitoring space     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           83 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   7.5.5     Defining axis-specific monitoring spaces  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                                         Operating mode T1 or T2                                         A safety configuration is open.                                         Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                 1. Select the Monitoring spaces tab and select the monitoring space from                                         the list.                                          The parameters of the monitoring space are displayed.                                      2. Enter the name of the monitoring space (max. 24 characters).                                      3. Select the space type Axis space and set the parameters of the monitor-                                         ing space.                                      4. Press Properties.                                          The Axis-specific properties of {0} window opens.                                      5. Select axis from the list.                                          The axis-specific properties are displayed.                                      6. Activate the monitoring of axis limits by setting the check mark at Monitor-                                         ing.                                      7. Move the axis to the upper axis limit in axis-specific mode.                                      8. Press Touch-up to save the current axis position.                                      9. Move the axis to the lower axis limit in axis-specific mode.                                      10. Press Touch-up to save the current axis position.                                      11. Repeat steps 5 to 10 to define the axis limits for additional axis ranges.  A maximum of 8 axes or, in the case of kinematic systems with mas-                                              ter/slave axes, a maximum of 8 drives can be configured for each                                              monitoring space.  Monitoring space     Fig. 7-10: Defining an axis-specific monitoring space  Defining an axis-specific monitoring space:     84 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration   Parameter                    Description                           Type                         Type of monitoring space                                                        working space = The axes must move within                                                        the configured limits of the monitoring space.                                                        (Space violation if the axes leave the monitoring                                                        space.)                                                        protected space = The axes must move outside                                                        the configured limits of the monitoring space.                                                        (Space violation if the axes enter the monitoring                                                        space.)                                                        Default: working space                           Activation                   Activation of monitoring space                                                        always off = monitoring space is not active.                                                        always active = monitoring space is always                                                        active.                                                        by input = monitoring space is activated by a                                                        safe input.                                                        If interface X13 is used, safe inputs are only                                                        available for monitoring spaces 12 … 16.                                                        (>>> 8.2 "SafeOperation via interface X13"                                                        Page 136)                                                        Default: always off                           Space type                   Type of monitoring space                                                        Cartesian space = Cartesian monitoring space                                                        Axis space = axis-specific monitoring space                                                        Default: Cartesian space                           Stop at boundaries           A stop is triggered if the space is violated.                                                        Check box active: Robot stops if the monitoring                                                        space limits are exceeded.                                                        Check box not active: Robot does not stop if the                                                        monitoring space limits are exceeded.                                                        Default: Robot stops at boundaries.                           V max                        Limit value of the space-specific velocity                                                           0.5 … 30,000 mm/s                                                        Default: 30,000 mm/s     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              85 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Parameter                Description                                       Vmax valid if            Validity of the space-specific velocity                                                                not used = space-specific velocity is not moni-                                                                tored.                                                                Space not violated = space-specific velocity is                                                                monitored if the monitoring space is not violated.                                                                Space violated = space-specific velocity is mon-                                                                itored if the monitoring space is violated.                                                                Default: not used                                       Stop if mastering test   Activation of reference stop                                       not yet done                                                                Check box active: Reference stop is activated for                                                                the monitoring space.                                                                Check box not active: Reference stop is not acti-                                                                vated for the monitoring space.                                                                Default: Reference stop activated.  Properties     Fig. 7-11: Defining axis-specific properties    86 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                     7 Start-up and configuration   Icon         Description                                              Icon for rotational and infinitely rotating axes  Icon for linear axes  Defining properties:  Parameter                             Description  Monitoring                            Activation of monitoring                                        Check box active: Monitoring is activated.                                        Check box not active: Monitoring is not activated.                                        Default: Monitoring is not activated.  Lower limit                           Lower limit of the axis-specific monitoring space  (lower axis limit)                        Rotational axes: -360° … +360°                                             Default: -360°                                            Linear axes: -30,000 mm … +30,000 mm                                             Default: -30,000 mm                                        The lower limit of an axis-specific workspace must be at least                                        0.5° or 1.5 mm less than the upper limit.                                        The axis-specific protected space is dependent on the maxi-                                        mum axis velocity. The minimum size for the axis-specific pro-                                        tected space is equal to the distance that the relevant axis can                                        travel at maximum axis velocity in an interval of 18 ms. If this                                        minimum value is violated, a message is displayed.  Current position                      Axis-specific actual position (display only)                                            Red: axis position not allowed, as monitoring space is violat-                                             ed                                            Green: axis position allowed  Upper limit                           Upper limit of the axis-specific monitoring space  (upper axis limit)                        Rotational axes: -360° … +360°                                             Default: 360°                                            Linear axes: -30,000 mm … +30,000 mm                                             Default: 30,000 mm                                        The upper limit of an axis-specific workspace must be at least                                        0.5° or 1.5 mm greater than the lower limit.                                        The axis-specific protected space is dependent on the maxi-                                        mum axis velocity. The minimum size for the axis-specific pro-                                        tected space is equal to the distance that the relevant axis can                                        travel at maximum axis velocity in an interval of 18 ms. If this                                        minimum value is violated, a message is displayed.   7.5.6     Defining axis-specific velocity monitoring  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              T1 or T2 mode                              A safety configuration is open.                              To modify option-specific monitoring functions: Safe monitoring is active.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              87 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Monitoring of the braking time and the maximum axis velocity in T1 is                                              part of the standard safety configuration and always active. The cor-                                              responding parameters can also be modified if safe monitoring is de-                                      activated.  Procedure                 1. Select the Axis monitoring tab.                                      2. Edit the parameters of the standard safety configuration as required.                                      3. If necessary, activate monitoring of the safely reduced axis velocity for one                                         axis. To do so, select the desired axis and set the check mark at Monitor-                                         ing.                                      4. Change the limit value for the safely reduced axis velocity if necessary.                                      5. Modify the maximum velocity for rotational axes and linear axes (valid                                         globally for every axis).  Description     Fig. 7-12: Defining axis velocities     88 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration   Icon         Description                                             Icon for rotational and infinitely rotating axes  Icon for linear axes  Defining axis velocities:  Parameter                             Description Monitoring                            Activation of monitoring                                       Check box active: Axis is monitored.                                       Check box not active: Axis is not monitored.                                       Default: Axis is not monitored. Braking time                          Duration of the monitored axis-specific braking ramp for safety                                       stop 1 and safety stop 2                                           500 … 15,000 ms                                       Default: 1,500 ms                                        (>>> 7.5.6.1 "Parameter Braking time" Page 90) Maximum velocity T1                   Maximum axis velocity in T1                                           Rotational axes: 1.0 … 100.00 °/s                                            Default: 30 °/s                                           Linear axes: 1.0 … 1,500 mm/s                                            Default: 250 mm/s                                       This parameter enables a servo gun, for example, to be cali-                                       brated in T1 with a higher velocity than 250 mm/s.                                       Note: The Cartesian velocities at the flange and at the TCP are                                       monitored independently of this parameter and cannot exceed                                       250 mm/s. Reduced velocity                      Limit value for safely reduced axis velocity                                           Rotational axes: 0.5 … 5,000 °/s                                            Default: 5,000°/s                                           Linear axes: 1.5 … 10,000 mm/s                                            Default: 10,000 mm/s Maximum velocity rotational           Limit value for global maximum velocity for rotational axes axis                                           0.5 … 5,000 °/s                                       Default: 1,000°/s                                       The axis-specific protected space is dependent on the global                                       maximum axis velocity. A defined minimum size for the axis-                                       specific protected space is derived from the global maximum                                       axis velocity; the size must not fall below this value. If this mini-                                       mum value is violated, a message is displayed. Maximum velocity transla-             Limit value for global maximum velocity for translational axes tional axis                                           0.5 … 30,000 mm/s                                       Default: 5,000 mm/s                                       The axis-specific protected space is dependent on the global                                       maximum axis velocity. A defined minimum size for the axis-                                       specific protected space is derived from the global maximum                                       axis velocity; the size must not fall below this value. If this mini-                                       mum value is violated, a message is displayed.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              89 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   7.5.6.1   Parameter Braking time  Description               If a safety stop 1 or 2 occurs, the safety controller monitors the braking pro-                                      cess. Among other things, it monitors whether the axis-specific velocity re-                                      mains below its monitoring ramp. If the velocity is too high, i.e. if the ramp is                                      violated, then the safety controller triggers a safety stop 0.                                      The monitoring ramp can be specified using the parameter Braking time.  The parameter Braking time modifies the monitoring ramp. It does                                              not modify the actual time required by the kinematic system for brak-                                              ing.  Only alter the default time if it is necessary to do so. This                                                          might be required, for example, in the case of very heavy                                      machines and/or very heavy loads as these cannot stop within the default                                      time.                                      The safety recovery technician must check whether and to what extent the                                      Braking time value needs to be modified in each specific application. He                                      must also check whether the modification makes additional safety measures                                      necessary, e.g. installation of a gate lock.  The monitoring ramp is determined as follows:                                         The robot controller subtracts 200 ms from the value of the parameter                                          Braking time (taking into account the brake closing time). The result is the                                          monitoring time. For example, the default value of 1 500 ms results in a                                          monitoring time of 1 300 ms.                                          When this time has elapsed, another monitoring function begins:                                         The ramp has plateaus of 300 ms at the start and end.                                          The plateau at the start is always 106% of the rated speed of the axis. The                                          plateau at the end is always 10.6 %.     Fig. 7-13: Monitoring ramp  1    Velocity profile during braking (example)                                             2    Monitoring ramp (default value Braking time 1 500 ms)                                             3    From this moment on, standstill monitoring begins.                                           vrs    Rated speed of the axis (rs = "rated speed")                                              t   Time                                                  The value “0” on the time axis is the moment at which the safety                                                  stop 1 or 2 begins.     90 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                   7 Start-up and configuration   Limitations                  Braking time can be configured separately for each axis; at the moment                               of braking, however, the value used for all axes is always the highest value                               entered.                               Recommendation: for greater transparency, enter the same value for all                               axes.                              The parameter Braking time usually has no effect in T1, since it refers to                               the axis-specific monitoring. In T1, however, there is another (non-config-                               urable) monitoring function for the Cartesian velocity on the flange. This is                               usually stricter.  Value increased          If the value Braking time is increased, this has the following effect:                          The monitoring ramp becomes longer and flatter, i.e. monitoring is now less                          strict. There is now a lower probability that a braking process will violate the                          ramp.     Fig. 7-14: Example: value is increased  1    Velocity profile during braking (example)                                  2    Monitoring (lower Braking time value)                                  3    Monitoring (higher Braking time value)  Value reduced            If the value “Braking time” is reduced, this has the following effect:                          The monitoring ramp becomes shorter and steeper, i.e. monitoring is now                          stricter. There is now a higher probability that a braking process will violate the                          ramp.   7.5.7     Defining the safe operational stop for axis groups  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              Operating mode T1 or T2                              A safety configuration is open.                              Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                1. Select the Axis monitoring tab and press Safe operational stop.                               The Safe operational stop window opens.                          2. Select axis from the list.                          3. Enter the position tolerance for this axis.  The position tolerance configured here also applies to the global safe                                    operational stop, with which all axes are monitored.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            91 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    The global safe operational stop is one of the standard safety func-                                              tions. The position tolerances can also be modified if safe monitoring                                              is deactivated.  4. Activate one or more axis groups in which the axis is to be monitored by                                         activating the corresponding check box (set the check mark).                                      5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to define further monitoring functions.  A maximum of 8 axes or, in the case of kinematic systems with mas-                                              ter/slave axes, a maximum of 8 drives can be configured for each axis                                              group.  Description     Fig. 7-15: Defining a safe operational stop  Icon        Description                                                       Icon for rotational and infinitely rotating axes  Icon for linear axes  Defining the safe operational stop:   92 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                  7 Start-up and configuration    Parameter                             Description  Monitoring in axis groups 1-6         Safe operational stop for axis group 1 … 6                                        Check box active: Axis is monitored in axis group.                                        Check box not active: Axis is not monitored in axis group.                                        Default: No monitoring  Position tolerance                    Tolerance for standstill monitoring in the case of safe opera-                                        tional stop. The axis may still move within this tolerance when a                                        safe operational stop is active.                                            Rotational axes: 0.001° … 1°                                             Default: 0.01°                                            Linear axes: 0.003 … 3 mm                                             Default: 0.1 mm   7.5.8     Defining safe tools  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              Operating mode T1 or T2                              A safety configuration is open.                              Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                1. Select the Tools tab and select a tool from the list.                               The parameters of the safe tool are displayed.                          2. Activate safe tool. To do so, set the check mark at Activation.                          3. Enter a name for the tool (max. 24 characters).                          4. Define the safe TCP of the tool.                          5. Press Properties.                               The Properties of {0} window opens.                          6. Select a sphere from the list and activate monitoring of the sphere. To do                             so, set the check mark at Monitoring.                          7. Enter the coordinates of the center of the sphere and the radius of the                             sphere.                          8. Repeat steps 6 to 7 to define additional spheres for the safe tool.  Tool     Fig. 7-16: Defining a safe tool  Defining a safe tool:     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           93 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Parameter                Description                                       Activation               Activation of the safe tool                                                                Check box active: Safe tool is activated.                                                                Check box not active: Safe tool is not activated.                                                                Default tool 1: Activated                                                                Default tool 2 … 16: Not activated                                                                Note: If interface X13 is used, tool 1 is always                                                                active. The tool cannot be activated via a safe                                                                input. An automated, safely monitored tool                                                                change is thus not possible.                                       TCP X, Y, Z              X, Y and Z coordinates of the safe TCP for                                                                velocity monitoring                                                                   -10,000 mm … +10,000 mm                                                                Default: 0 mm  Properties     Fig. 7-17: Defining the properties of the safe tool    94 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                   7 Start-up and configuration   Defining properties:  Parameter                  Description                              Monitoring                 Activation of monitoring of the sphere                                                         Check box active: Sphere is monitored.                                                         Check box not active: Sphere is not monitored.                                                         Default sphere 1: Monitoring active                                                         Default spheres 2 to 6: Monitoring deactivated                              X, Y, Z                    X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center                                                         point relative to the FLANGE coordinate system                                                            -10,000 mm … +10,000 mm                                                         Default: 0 mm                              Radius                     Radius of the sphere at the safe tool                                                            10 … 10,000 mm                                                         Default: 250 mm                                                         The sphere radius must not fall below the pre-                                                         defined minimum value. This radius is depen-                                                         dent on the global maximum Cartesian velocity.                                                         (>>> "Minimum sphere radius" Page 72)   7.5.9     Defining the reference position  Precondition                  User group “Safety maintenance”                               Operating mode T1 or T2                               A safety configuration is open.                               Safe monitoring is active.  Procedure                1. Select the tool and base for Cartesian jogging.                          2. Select the Reference position tab.                          3. Move robot to the reference position.                          4. Select one of the robot axes.                          5. Press Touch-up reference position                             for group to accept the current flange position of the robot as the refer-                             ence position for the axes in reference group 1.                                The coordinates of the Cartesian reference position are displayed in the                                configuration window.                          6. If external axes are configured, enter the number of the corresponding ref-                             erence group for each external axis.                          7. If present, move external axes in reference group 2 to the reference posi-                             tion and save with Touch-up reference position                             for group.                          8. If present, move external axes in reference group 3 to the reference posi-                             tion and save with Touch-up reference position                             for group.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            95 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Description     Fig. 7-18: Defining the reference position  Icon        Description                                                       Icon for rotational and infinitely rotating axes  Icon for linear axes  Defining the reference position:     96 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                      7 Start-up and configuration    Parameter                             Description  Reference group                       Each axis that is to be subjected to safe monitoring must be                                        assigned to a reference group. Robot axes are always assigned                                        to reference group 1. External axes can be assigned to other                                        reference groups, but also to reference group 1, e.g. in the case                                        of a KL.                                            1: Robot axes                                            1 … 3: External axes                                        Default: 1  Reference position                    Axis-specific coordinates of the reference position                                        To monitor the mastering, the axis angles of the robot axes are                                        defined for a specific Cartesian reference position. During the                                        mastering test, the robot moves to the Cartesian reference posi-                                        tion and the actual position of the axes is compared with the                                        command position.                                            Rotational axes: -360° … +360°                                             Default: 45°                                            Linear axes: -30,000 mm … +30,000 mm                                             Default: 1,000 mm  Current position                      Axis-specific actual position (display only)                                            Red: reference position not allowed, as too near mastering                                             position                                            Green: reference position allowed  Mastering position                    The axis angles at the mastering position are defined in the                                        machine data. (display only)  Cartesian reference position          X, Y and Z coordinates of the Cartesian reference position rela-  X, Y, Z                               tive to the WORLD coordinate system (display for reference                                        group 1)                                        The coordinates of the Cartesian reference position refer to the                                        center point of the mounting flange.                                            -30,000 mm … +30,000 mm                                        Default: 0 mm   7.5.10    Saving the safety configuration   Serious injury and severe damage to the robot can be                                                caused by an error during saving or a failed reinitializa-                           tion. If an error message is displayed after saving, the safety configuration                           must be checked and saved again.  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              A safety configuration is open.                              Safety configuration is completed.  Procedure                1. Press Save and answer the request for confirmation with Yes.                               The safety configuration is saved on the hard drive and the checksum of                               the safety configuration is saved to the RDC.                               The robot controller is automatically reinitialized.                          2. The checksum and activation code of the safety configuration are dis-                             played on the General tab.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                               97 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Note the checksum and activation code in the checklist for safety func-                                          tions.                                          (>>> 11.1.3 "Checklist for safety functions" Page 172)   7.6       Mastering test  7.6.1     Overview, mastering test  Description               The mastering test is used to check whether the current position of the robot                                      and the external axes corresponds to a reference position.  Infinitely rotating axes are taken into consideration in the mastering                                              test with modulo 360°, i.e. the reference position is always relative to                                              the circle.  If the deviation between the current position and the reference position is too                                      great, the mastering test has failed. The robot stops with a safety stop 1 and                                      can only be moved in T1 mode. If the mastering test run was successful, the                                      robot can be safely monitored using the safety controller.                                      The position to be monitored is not verified until a mastering test has been car-                                      ried out. It is advisable to perform the mastering test as quickly as possible.  The safety maintenance personnel must determine, by means of a                                              risk assessment, whether additional system-specific safety measures                                              are required, e.g. reference stop if the mastering test has not been                                      carried out.  Reference group           Each axis that is to be subjected to safe monitoring must be assigned to a ref-                                      erence group. Robot axes are always assigned to reference group 1. External                                      axes can be assigned to other reference groups, but also to reference group                                      1, e.g. in the case of a KL.                                         1: Robot axes                                         1 … 3: External axes                                      All axes of a reference group are mastered together.  During the mastering test, all axes of a reference group must be in the                                              reference position in order to actuate the reference switch. If not all                                              the axes of a reference group are involved in actuating the reference                                      switch, the position of the axes cannot be checked.  Requirement               The following events cause a mastering test to be requested:                                         Robot controller is rebooted (internal request)                                         Robot is remastered (internal request)                                         I/O driver is reconfigured (internal request)                                         Input $MASTERINGTEST_REQ_EXT is set externally, e.g. by a safety                                          PLC (external request)  Monitoring time           Once the robot controller has booted, the robot can be moved for 2 hours with-                                      out a mastering test. Once the monitoring time has elapsed, the robot stops                                      with a safety stop 1 and the safety controller generates the following message:                                      Ackn.: Mastering test time interval expired.  Execution                 The mastering test is carried out using the program MasRef_Main.SRC. It can                                      be started in the following ways:     98 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration       Automatic                               Integrate MasRef_Main.SRC into the application program in such a way                               that it is cyclically called as a subprogram. If a mastering test is requested,                               the robot detects this and starts the mastering test.                              Manual                               For this, start the program MasRef_Main.SRC manually.  If the reference switch is activated via PROFIsafe or                                                CIP Safety, the PLC input Mastering test must only be                           reset if the reference switch is actuated on both channels. This prevents a                           single-channel mastering test.  Overview                       Step          Description                                   1          Select reference position.                                               (>>> 7.6.4 "Selecting a reference position" Page 101)                                   2          Install reference switch and actuating plate.                                              (>>> 7.6.4.1 "Installing the reference switch and actuating                                              plate" Page 101)                                   3          Connect the reference switch.                                               (>>> 7.6.4.2 "Connecting a reference switch" Page 102)                                   4          Configure the input signal $MASTERINGTEST_REQ_EXT                                              for the external mastering test request.                                              This signal is declared in the file $machine.dat in the direc-                                              tory KRC:\ROBOTER\KRC\STEU\MADA and must be                                              assigned to a suitable input. By default, the signal is routed                                              to $IN[1026].                                   5          Teach positions for the mastering test in the program                                              MasRef_USER.SRC.                                              The reference position must be taught in the program                                              MasRef_USER.SRC and in the safety configuration.                                              (>>> 7.6.5 "Teaching positions for the mastering test"                                              Page 103)                                               (>>> 7.5.9 "Defining the reference position" Page 95)                                   6          Only if the reference switch is actuated by a ferromagnetic                                              part of the tool or following a tool change:                                                 Check the accuracy of the reference position.                                                  (>>> 7.6.6 "Checking the reference position (actuation                                                  with tool)" Page 105)                                   7          If the mastering test is to be executed automatically:                                              Integrate MasRef_Main.SRC into the application program                                              in such a way that it is cyclically called as a subprogram.                                   8          If the mastering test is to be executed manually:                                              Start the program MasRef_Main.SRC manually.                                              (>>> 7.6.7 "Performing a mastering test manually"                                              Page 105)   7.6.2     Programs for the mastering test  The following programs are used for the mastering test:     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             99 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Program                   Directory            Description              MasRef_Main.SRC           R1\System            The program checks whether a mastering test is                                                             required and must be executed as soon as possi-                                                             ble after an internal request. If the program is not                                                             executed within 2 hours, the robot stops and the                                                             robot controller generates a message.                                                             If a mastering test is required, the robot performs it                                                             immediately.                                                             The program calls the program                                                             MasRef_USER.SRC that is used to address the                                                             reference position.              MasRef_USER.SRC           R1\Program           The program contains 3 subprograms for moving to                                                             reference positions 1 to 3 and 3 subprograms for                                                             the motion away from reference positions 1 to 3                                                             after the mastering test has been performed.                                                             If the motion away from the reference position is                                                             not taught, the robot and external axes remain sta-                                                             tionary after the mastering test. The robot controller                                                             generates an error message.   7.6.3     Variables for the mastering test   Variable                              Description              $MASTERINGTEST_ACTIVE                 State of the mastering test                                                    TRUE = mastering test is active.                                                    FALSE = no mastering test is active.              $MASTERINGTEST_GROUP                  Number of the reference group that is currently in the refer-                                                    ence position                                                       0: No reference group in reference position                                                       1 … 3: Reference group with this number in reference                                                        position              $MASTERINGTEST_REQ_INT                Internal mastering test request from the safety controller                                                    TRUE = mastering test is requested.                                                    FALSE = mastering test is not requested.              $MASTERINGTEST_REQ_EXT                Input for the external request for mastering test, e.g. from                                                    the safety PLC                                                    TRUE = mastering test is requested.                                                    FALSE = mastering test is not requested.                                                    Note: This signal is declared in the file $machine.dat in the                                                    directory KRC:\ROBOTER\KRC\STEU\MADA and must be                                                    assigned to a suitable input. By default, the signal is routed                                                    to $IN[1026].              $MASTERINGTEST_SWITCH_                Check of the function of the reference switch              OK                                                    TRUE = reference switch is OK.                                                    FALSE = reference switch is defective.     100 / 205                                                          Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                   7 Start-up and configuration   7.6.4     Selecting a reference position  Description              The reference position can be approached with the actuating plate or with a                          ferromagnetic part of the tool as follows:     Fig. 7-19: Example: position of the actuating plate on the reference                          switch  1     Tool                              2     Actuating plate                              3     Reference switch                              4     Mechanical mounting fixture for the reference switch                              5     Actuated reference switch  Selection criteria       The reference run must be selected in accordance with the following criteria:                              The position of the reference switch and actuating plate does not interfere                               with the work sequence of the robot.                              The reference position is not a position in which the axes are in a singular-                               ity.                              In the reference position, both proximity switch surfaces of the reference                               switch are actuated by the switching surface (actuating plate or tool).                              All axes of a reference group are in the reference position in order to actu-                               ate the reference switch.                              In the reference position, the robot axes are at least ±5° (rotational axes)                               or ±15 mm (linear axes) away from the mastering position.                              The position of the reference switch is within the motion range of the robot.   7.6.4.1   Installing the reference switch and actuating plate  Precondition                 The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                               persons from switching it on again.                              The reference run has been selected in accordance with the required cri-                               teria.                                  (>>> "Selection criteria" Page 101)   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            101 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Procedure                 1. Prepare a mechanical mounting fixture for mounting the reference switch.                                       2. Attach the reference switch to the mounting fixture.                                       3. If the actuating plate is being used, fasten the actuating plate to the robot                                          flange or tool.  Example     Fig. 7-20: Example of an actuating plate on the tool  1   Robot                                          2   Actuating plate on tool                                          3   Tool                                          4   Reference switch on mounting fixture   7.6.4.2   Connecting a reference switch   The robot controller is preconfigured for the specific in-                                                            dustrial robot. If cables are interchanged, the manipula-                                       tor and the external axes (optional) may receive incorrect data and can thus                                       cause personal injury or material damage. If a system consists of more than                                       one manipulator, always connect the connecting cables to the manipulators                                       and their corresponding robot controllers.  In the case of a KR C4, only 1 reference switch can be connected di-                                              rectly to the robot controller. If multiple reference groups are required,                                              the reference switches can be connected to the safety PLC and acti-                                       vated via PROFIsafe or CIP Safety. The safety PLC must evaluate the refer-                                       ence switches and set the input Mastering test accordingly.  A KR C4 compact is not equipped with a connection allowing a refer-                                              ence switch to be connected to the robot controller. Reference switch-                                              es must be connected to the safety PLC and activated via PROFIsafe                                       or CIP Safety. The safety PLC must evaluate the reference switches and set                                       the input Mastering test accordingly.     102 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                     7 Start-up and configuration   Precondition                  The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                                persons from switching it on again.                               Reference switch is installed.                               Reference cable X42 - XS Ref (maximum cable length 40 m)  The following procedure applies only to connection of the reference                                     switch to a KR C4.   Procedure                1. Route the reference cable X42 - XS Ref correctly (in a fixed installation or                             cable carrier).  When routing the cable, avoid mechanical damage and                                                   observe the minimum bending radii.  The following bending radii serve as guide values:                              Type of routing                          Bending radius                              Fixed installation                       Min. 5xØ of cable                              Installation in cable carrier            Min. 10xØ of cable  2. Connect the reference cable: Connect X42 to the robot controller and XS                             Ref to the reference switch.   7.6.5     Teaching positions for the mastering test  Description              The following points must be taught for each reference group:                               Motion to the reference switch                               Reference position  The reference position must additionally be taught in the safety con-                                     figuration.       Motion away from the reference switch  Precondition                  Reference switch is installed and connected.                               User group “Safety maintenance”                               T1 or T2 operating mode  Procedure                1. Open the program MasRef_USER.SRC.                          2. Insert a HALT statement in the subprograms MASREFSTARTGX() and                             MASREFBACKGX().                          3. Close the program MasRef_USER.SRC.                          4. Select the program MasRef_Main.SRC.                          5. Perform block selection to the subprogram RunTest_Group(X).                          6. Press the Start key. The subprogram MASREFSTARTGX() of the program                             MasRef_USER.SRC is called.                          7. In the subprogram MASREFSTARTGX(), program a motion to a point ap-                             prox. 10 cm before the reference switch and teach the required points.                          8. Program a LIN motion to the reference switch so that it is actuated. This                             position is the reference position.  The distance from the reference switch must not exceed 2 mm in the                                     reference position. If the distance is greater, the reference switch will                                     not be actuated.  9. Teach the reference position.                          10. Do not move the robot.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              103 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   11. Teach the reference position in the safety configuration.                                            (>>> 7.5.9 "Defining the reference position" Page 95)                                      12. Return to the subprogram MASREFSTARTGX() and perform a block se-                                          lection to the END line.                                      13. Press the Start key. The subprogram MASREFBACKGX() of the program                                          MasRef_USER.SRC is called.                                      14. In the subprogram MASREFBACKGX(), program the motion away from                                          the reference position and teach the required points.                                      15. Deselect the program and save the changes.                                      16. For automatic operation, delete all HALT statements from the program                                          MasRef_USER.SRC once again.                                      17. Cyclically call the program MasRef_Main.SRC at a suitable point and en-                                          able execution of the mastering test after an internal request.  Program                    1 DEF MasRef_USER()                                        2 END                                        3                                        4 GLOBAL DEF MASREFSTARTG1()                                        5 Teach path and reference position for group 1                                        6                                        7 END                                        8                                        9 GLOBAL DEF MASREFSTARTG2()                                       10 Teach path and reference position for group 2                                       11                                       12 END                                       13                                       14 GLOBAL DEF MASREFSTARTG3()                                       15 Teach path and reference position for group 3                                       16                                       17 END                                       18                                       19 GLOBAL DEF MASREFBACKG1()                                       20 Teach path back for group 1                                       21                                       22 END                                       23                                       24 GLOBAL DEF MASREFBACKG2()                                       25 Teach path back for group 2                                       26                                       27 END                                       28                                       29 GLOBAL DEF MASREFBACKG3()                                       30 Teach path back for group 3                                       31                                       32 END  Line          Description                                       5             Program the motion to the reference position of reference                                                     group 1 and teach the reference position.                                       10            Program the motion to the reference position of reference                                                     group 2 and teach the reference position.                                       15            Program the motion to the reference position of reference                                                     group 3 and teach the reference position.                                       20            Teach the motion away from the reference position of refer-                                                     ence group 1.     104 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                     7 Start-up and configuration   Line         Description                              25           Teach the motion away from the reference position of refer-                                           ence group 2.                              30           Teach the motion away from the reference position of refer-                                           ence group 3.   7.6.6     Checking the reference position (actuation with tool)   The robot can move beyond the configured limits if the                                                reference switch is actuated by a ferromagnetic part of                           the tool and the accuracy at the reference position is exceeded. Severe phys-                           ical injuries or damage to property may result. The accuracy of the reference                           position must be checked.  If the tool is exchanged, the reference position and the                                               accuracy of the reference position must be checked. If                           required, the reference position must be adapted to the new tool. Failure to                           observe this precaution may result in severe physical injuries or considerable                           damage to property.  Precondition                  Reference switch is installed and connected.                               The reference position has been taught in the program                                MasRef_USER.SRC and in the safety configuration.                               User group “Safety maintenance”                               Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. Open the program MasRef_USER.SRC.                          2. In the subprogram MASREFSTARTGX(), insert a HALT statement imme-                             diately before the END line.                          3. Close the program MasRef_USER.SRC.                          4. Select the program MasRef_Main.SRC.                          5. Perform block selection to the subprogram RunTest_Group(X).                          6. Press the Start key. The subprogram MASREFSTARTGX() of the program                             MasRef_USER.SRC is called and the robot moves to the reference posi-                             tion.                          7. Jog each axis individually in the positive and negative directions using the                             jog keys and observe when the reference switch is no longer actuated.                          8. Analyze the axis-specific tolerances determined in this way for the master-                             ing test relative to the application and select a different reference position                             if necessary.                          9. For automatic operation, delete all HALT statements from the program                             MasRef_USER.SRC once again.   7.6.7     Performing a mastering test manually  Precondition                  Reference switch is installed and connected.  If the reference switch is connected to the robot controller via inter-                                     face X42, the mastering test can be executed in Start-up mode.       The reference position has been taught in the program                                MasRef_USER.SRC and in the safety configuration.                               T1 or T2 mode    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              105 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    The robot moves in T2 mode at the programmed velocity                                                            and can cause personal injury or material damage. Make                                       sure that the robot cannot collide and that no persons are in the motion range                                       of the robot.  Procedure                    Select and execute the program MasRef_Main.SRC to the end of the pro-                                           gram.   7.7       Brake test  7.7.1     Overview of the brake test  Description               Each robot axis has a holding brake integrated into the motor. The brake test                                       checks every axis at low speed and at the current temperature to see if the                                       braking torque is sufficiently high, i.e. whether it exceeds a certain minimum                                       value. The minimum value for the individual axes is stored in the machine da-                                       ta. (The brake test does not calculate the absolute value of the braking torque.)  Request                   If the brake test is active, the following events cause a brake test to be request-                                       ed:                                          Input $BRAKETEST_REQ_EX is set externally, e.g. by a PLC (external                                           request)                                          Robot controller boots with a cold start (internal request)                                          Function test of the brake test (internal request)                                          Brake test cycle time has elapsed (internal request)  Cycle time                The cycle time is 46 h. It is deemed to have elapsed when the drives have                                       been under servo-control for a total of 46 h. The robot controller then requests                                       a brake test and generates the following message: Brake test required. The                                       robot can be moved for another 2 hours. It then stops and the robot controller                                       generates the following acknowledgement message: Cyclical check for brake                                       test request not made. Once the message has been acknowledged, the robot                                       can be moved for another 2 hours.  Execution                 A precondition for the brake test is that the robot is at operating temperature.                                       This is the case after approx. 1 h in normal operation.                                       The brake test is carried out using the program BrakeTestReq.SRC. It can be                                       started in the following ways:                                          Automatically                                           Integrate BrakeTestReq.SRC into the application program in such a way                                           that it is cyclically called as a subprogram. If a brake test is requested, the                                           robot detects this and starts the brake test.                                          Manually                                           Start the program BrakeTestReq.SRC manually.  Sequence                  The brake test checks all brakes one after the other.                                       1. The robot accelerates to a defined velocity. (The velocity cannot be influ-                                          enced by the user.)                                       2. Once the robot has reached the velocity, the brake is applied and the re-                                          sult for this braking operation is displayed in the message window.                                       3. If a brake has been identified as being defective, the brake test can be re-                                          peated for confirmation or the robot can be moved to the parking position.                                           If a brake has reached the wear limit, the robot controller indicates this by                                           means of a message. A worn brake will soon be identified as defective.                                           Until then, the robot can be moved without restrictions.   106 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                     7 Start-up and configuration    If a brake has been identified as being defective, the drives remain                                    under servo-control for 2 hours following the start of the brake test (=                                    monitoring time). The robot controller then switches the drives off.  Overview                        Step         Description                              In WorkVisual:                                   1          If required: Activate the brake test in WorkVisual.                                               (>>> 7.7.2 "Activating the brake test" Page 107)                              On the robot controller:                                   2          Configure input and output signals for the brake test.                                               (>>> 7.7.4 "Configuring input and output signals for the                                              brake test" Page 108)                                   3          Teach positions for the brake test.                                              The parking position must be taught. The start position and                                              end position can be taught.                                              (>>> 7.7.5 "Teaching positions for the brake test"                                              Page 111)                                   4          If the brake test is to be carried out automatically:                                              Integrate BrakeTestReq.SRC into the application program                                              in such a way that it is cyclically called as a subprogram.                                   5          If the brake test is to be carried out manually:                                              Start the program BrakeTestReq.SRC manually.                                               (>>> 7.7.6 "Performing a manual brake test" Page 112)                                   6          If required: Test the function of the brake test.                                               (>>> 7.7.7 "Checking that the brake test is functioning cor-                                              rectly" Page 113)   7.7.2     Activating the brake test       If a safety option is installed and the safe monitoring is active, the brake                                test is automatically active.                               If the brake test is not automatically active, the user has the option of man-                                ually activating it. This must be carried out in WorkVisual.  If the brake test is not automatically active, the user must carry out a                                    risk assessment to determine whether it is necessary to activate the                                    brake test for the specific application.  Further information about activating the brake test is contained in the                                    WorkVisual documentation.    7.7.3     Programs for the brake test  The programs are located in the directory C:\KRC\ROBOT-                          ER\KRC\R1\TP\BrakeTest.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              107 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Program                      Description              BrakeTestReq.SRC             This program performs the brake test.                                           It can be performed in the following ways:                                              Integrate the program into the application program in such a way that                                               it is cyclically called as a subprogram. If a brake test is requested, the                                               robot detects this and performs the brake test immediately.                                              Execute the program manually.                                              Test the function of the brake test. The robot controller executes Bra-                                               keTestReq.SRC with special parameterization.              BrakeTestPark.SRC            The parking position of the robot must be taught in this program.                                           The robot can be moved to the parking position if a brake has been                                           identified as being defective. Alternatively, the brake test can be                                           repeated for confirmation.              BrakeTestStart.SRC           The start position of the brake test can be taught in this program. The                                           robot starts the brake test from this position.                                           If the start position is not taught, the robot performs the brake test at the                                           actual position.              BrakeTestBack.SRC            The end position of the brake test can be taught in this program. The                                           robot moves to this position after the brake test.                                           If the end position is not taught, the robot remains at the actual position                                           after the brake test.              BrakeTestSelfT-              The program checks whether the brake test has correctly detected a              est.SRC                      defective brake. For this purpose, the robot controller executes BrakeT-                                           estReq.SRC with special parameterization.   7.7.4     Configuring input and output signals for the brake test  Description               All signals for the brake test are declared in the file $machine.dat in the direc-                                       tory KRC:\STEU\MADA.  These signals are not redundant in design and can sup-                                                           ply incorrect information. Do not use these signals for                                       safety-relevant applications.  Precondition                 “Expert” user group  Procedure                 1. Open the file $machine.dat in the directory KRC:\STEU\MADA in the Nav-                                          igator.                                       2. Assign inputs and outputs.                                       3. Save and close the file.  $machine.dat              Extract from the file $machine.dat (with default settings, without comments):                                        ...                                        SIGNAL $BRAKETEST_REQ_EX $IN[1026]                                        SIGNAL $BRAKETEST_MONTIME FALSE                                        ...                                        SIGNAL $BRAKETEST_REQ_INT FALSE                                        SIGNAL $BRAKETEST_WORK FALSE                                        SIGNAL $BRAKES_OK FALSE                                        SIGNAL $BRAKETEST_WARN FALSE                                        ...   Signals                   There is 1 input signal. By default, it is routed to $IN[1026].    108 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                   7 Start-up and configuration   The output signals are preset to FALSE. There is no compelling need to assign                         output numbers to them. It is only necessary to assign numbers if there is a                         need to be able to read the signals (e.g. via the variable correction function or                         program execution.)  Signal                              Description $BRAKETEST_REQ_EX                   Input                                        TRUE = brake test is being requested externally (e.g. by PLC).                                         The robot controller confirms the signal with                                         $BRAKETEST_REQ_INT = TRUE and generates message                                         27004.                                        FALSE = brake test is not being requested externally. $BRAKETEST_MONTIME                  Output                                        TRUE = robot was stopped due to elapsed monitoring time.                                         Acknowledgement message 27002 is generated.                                        FALSE = acknowledgement message 27002 is not active. (Not                                         generated, or has been acknowledged.) $BRAKETEST_REQ_INT                  Output                                        TRUE = message 27004 is active.                                         The signal is not set to FALSE again until a brake test is carried                                         out with a positive result, i.e. with message 27012.                                        FALSE = brake test is not requested (either internally or exter-                                         nally). $BRAKETEST_WORK                     Output                                        TRUE = brake test is currently being performed.                                        FALSE = brake test is not being performed.                                         If no defective brakes have been detected, message 27012 is                                         generated.                                     Edge TRUE → FALSE:                                        Test was successfully completed. No brake is defective. Mes-                                         sage 27012 is generated.                                        Or at least 1 defective brake was detected and the robot has                                         moved to the parking position.                                        Or the program was canceled during execution of the brake                                         test. $BRAKES_OK                          Output                                        Edge FALSE → TRUE: Output was set to FALSE by the pre-                                         vious brake test. The brake test was carried out again and no                                         defective brake was detected.                                        Edge TRUE → FALSE: A brake has just been detected as de-                                         fective. Message 27007 is generated. $BRAKETEST_WARN                     Output                                        Edge FALSE → TRUE: At least 1 brake has been detected as                                         having reached the wear limit. Message 27001 is generated at                                         the same time.                                        Edge TRUE → FALSE: Output was set to TRUE by the previ-                                         ous brake test. The brake test was carried out again and no                                         worn brake was detected.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             109 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Messages                                           No.         Message                                           27001       Brake {Brake no.}{Axis no.} has reached the wear limit                                           27002       Cyclical check for brake test request not made                                           27004       Brake test required                                           27007       Insufficient holding torque of brake {Brake no.}{Axis no.}                                           27012       Brake test successful   7.7.4.1   Signal diagram of the brake test – examples  Example 1                 The signal diagram for the brake test applies in the following case:                                            No brake has reached the wear limit.                                            No brake is defective.     Fig. 7-21: Signal diagram: brakes OK  Item    Description                                            1      The brake test is requested.                                            2      Automatic call of the program BrakeTestReq.SRC                                                   Start of the brake test                                            3      The brake test is completed.  Example 2                 The signal diagram for the brake test applies in the following case:                                            Brake A2 is worn.                                            Brake A4 is defective.     Fig. 7-22: Signal diagram: brakes not OK     110 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration   Item     Description                               1       The brake test is requested.                                       $BRAKETEST_REQ_INT is not set to FALSE again until a brake                                       test is carried out with a positive result.                               2       Automatic call of the program BrakeTestReq.SRC                                       Start of the brake test                               3       Brake A2 is tested: brake is worn.                               4       Brake A4 is tested: brake is defective.                               5       The robot has been moved to the parking position or the program                                       has been canceled.   7.7.5     Teaching positions for the brake test  Description              The parking position must be taught.                          The start position and end position can be taught.                              If the start position is not taught, the robot performs the brake test at the                               actual position.                              If the end position is not taught, the robot remains at the actual position af-                               ter the brake test.  Parking position         If a brake is identified as being defective, the robot can be moved to the park-                          ing position. Alternatively, the brake test can be repeated for confirmation.  The parking position must be selected in a position                                               where no persons are endangered if the robot sags be-                           cause of the defective brake. The transport position, for example, can be se-                           lected as the parking position.                           Further information about the transport position is contained in the robot op-                           erating or assembly instructions.  Precondition                 All output signals are assigned to outputs.                              “Expert” user group                              Operating mode T1  Procedure                1. Open the program BrakeTestStart.SRC in the directory R1\TP\BrakeTest.                          2. Teach the motions to the start position of the brake test.                                    The motions must be taught in such a way that the robot cannot cause                                     a collision on the way to the start position.                                    In the start position, every robot axis must have an available motion                                     range of ±10°.                          3. Save and close the program.                          4. Open the program BrakeTestBack.SRC in the directory R1\TP\BrakeTest.                          5. Teach the motions from the start position to the end position of the brake                             test.                               The start and end position may be identical.                          6. Save and close the program.                          7. Open the program BrakeTestPark.SRC in the directory R1\TP\BrakeTest.                          8. Program the motions from the end position to the parking position of the                             robot.                          9. Save and close the program.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             111 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   7.7.6     Performing a manual brake test   If a brake is identified as being defective and the drives                                                            are deactivated, the robot may sag. For this reason, no                                       stop may be triggered during the motion to the parking position. The monitor-                                       ing functions that can trigger a stop in this range (e.g. monitoring spaces)                                       must be deactivated beforehand. No safety functions may be executed that                                       would trigger a stop (e.g. E-STOP, opening the safety gate, change of oper-                                       ating mode, etc.).                                       If a brake has been identified as being defective, the parking position must                                       be approached no faster than at 10% of maximum velocity.  Program override for the test is automatically set to                                                           100%. The robot moves at high velocity. Make sure that                                       the robot cannot collide and that no persons are in the motion range of the                                       robot.  Precondition                 No persons or objects are present within the motion range of the robot.                                          In the start position, every robot axis has an available motion range of                                           ±10°. (Or, if no start position has been taught, in the actual position.)                                          The parking position has been taught in the program BrakeTestPark.SRC.                                          “Expert” user group                                          Program run mode GO                                          AUT mode                                          The robot is at operating temperature (= after approx. 1 h in normal oper-                                           ation).  Procedure                 1. Select the program BrakeTestReq.SRC in the directory R1\TP\BrakeTest                                          and press the Start key.                                       2. The following message is displayed: Performing manual brake test -                                          please acknowledge. Acknowledge the message.                                       3. Press the Start key. The message Programmed path reached (BCO) is                                          displayed.                                       4. Press the Start key. The brakes are tested, starting with A1.                                       5. Possible results:                                              If a brake is OK, this is indicated by the following message: Brake                                               {Brake no.}{Axis no.} OK.                                               If all brakes are OK, this is indicated after the brake test by the follow-                                               ing message: Brake test successful. (It is possible that one or more                                               brakes may have reached the wear limit. This is also indicated by a                                               message.)                                               Deselect the program BrakeTestReq.SRC.                                              If a brake is defective, this is indicated by the following message: In-                                               sufficient holding torque of brake {Brake no.}{Axis no.}.                                               Once all brakes have been tested, either press Repeat to repeat the                                               brake test for checking purposes                                               or press Park pos. to move the robot to the parking position.  If a brake has been identified as being defective, the drives remain                                               under servo-control for 2 hours following the start of the brake test (=                                               monitoring time). The robot controller then switches the drives off.     112 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                     7 Start-up and configuration   7.7.7     Checking that the brake test is functioning correctly  Description              It is possible to check whether the brake test has correctly detected a defective                          brake: the program BrakeTestSelfTest.SRC simulates a fault in the brakes                          and triggers a brake test. If the brake test detects the simulated fault, it is func-                          tioning correctly.  Program override for the test is automatically set to                                               100%. The robot moves at high velocity. Make sure that                           the robot cannot collide and that no persons are in the motion range of the                           robot.  Precondition                 No persons or objects are present within the motion range of the robot.                              In the start position, every robot axis has an available motion range of                               ±10°. (Or, if no start position has been taught, in the actual position.)                              The parking position has been taught in the program BrakeTestPark.SRC.                              “Expert” user group                              Program run mode GO                              AUT mode                              The robot is at operating temperature (= after approx. 1 h in normal oper-                               ation).  Procedure                1. Select the program BrakeTestSelfTest.SRC in the directory R1\TP\Bra-                             keTest and press the Start key.                          2. The following message is displayed: Performing self-test for brake test - please                             acknowledge. Confirm the message by pressing Ackn..                          3. Press the Start key.                          4. Result of the function test:                                  Message Insufficient holding torque of brake 3: The brake test has correct-                                   ly detected the simulated fault. The brake test is functioning correctly.                                   Deselect the program BrakeTestSelfTest.SRC.                                   Perform a manual brake test. This ensures that the simulated fault                                   does not remain active.                                  Any other message, or no message, means: The brake test has not                                   detected the simulated fault. The brake test is not functioning correctly.  If the function test establishes that the brake test is not                                                  functioning correctly:                               The robot must no longer be moved.                               KUKA Roboter GmbH must be contacted.   7.8       Override reduction for velocity and workspace limits  Override reduction for velocity and workspace limits is not a safety                                    function.   Description              Override reduction can be activated for the velocities and workspaces moni-                          tored by the safety controller:     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                              113 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2       Override reduction for the velocity ($SR_VEL_RED = TRUE)                                           If override reduction is active, the velocity is automatically reduced so that                                           the lowest currently monitored velocity limit is not exceeded.                                           The variable $SR_OV_RED specifies the reduction factor for the override                                           reduction as a percentage. The velocity is reduced to the following value:                                           lowest velocity limit * reduction factor                                               (>>> "Example" Page 114)                                          Override reduction for monitoring spaces ($SR_WORKSPACE_RED =                                           TRUE)                                           Override reduction is only relevant for monitoring spaces for which the                                           function Stop at boundaries is active, and the robot is stopped with a                                           safety stop if it violates the space limit.                                           The override reduction for monitoring spaces is only effective in modes T2,                                           AUT and AUT EXT. In T1 mode, the override reduction for monitoring                                           spaces is generally deactivated, i.e. it is also deactivated if                                           $SR_WORKSPACE_RED = TRUE.                                           If override reduction is active and the robot approaches the workspace lim-                                           it, the velocity is continuously reduced. When the robot moves over the                                           workspace limit and is stopped, the velocity has already been greatly re-                                           duced. The stopping distance is short and the robot quickly comes to a                                           standstill.                                           If override reduction is not active and the robot approaches the workspace                                           limit, the velocity is not reduced. The robot is still moving at full velocity                                           when it is stopped at the workspace limit. The robot does not come to a                                           standstill as quickly as with override reduction active, as the stopping dis-                                           tance is greater due to the higher velocity.                                      The variables for override reduction can be modified in the $CUSTOM.DAT                                      file, in a KRL program or via the variable correction function. If a variable is                                      modified, an advance run stop is triggered.                                      (>>> 7.8.3 "Variables for override reduction in $CUSTOM.DAT" Page 117)  Example                  Override reduction for the velocity:                                          $SR_VEL_RED = TRUE                                          $SR_OV_RED = 95                                      The lowest Cartesian velocity limit active on the safety controller is a space-                                      specific velocity of 1,000 mm/s. The override reduction function reduces the                                      Cartesian velocity at the safe TCP of the active tool to 950 mm/s. The override                                      reduction function is only triggered if it is foreseeable that the limit of 950 mm/s                                      would be exceeded without velocity reduction.     Fig. 7-23: Example: Override reduction with $SR_VEL_RED  v3     Maximum Cartesian velocity; v3 = 1,200 mm/s                                          v2     Space-specific velocity; v2 = 1,000 mm/s                                          v1     Velocity v2 * reduction factor; v1 = 1,000 mm/s * 95% = 950 mm/s   114 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                      7 Start-up and configuration   t1     Override reduction is triggered: without velocity reduction, the limit v1                                     would be exceeded.                              t2     Override reduction is no longer triggered.   7.8.1     Override reduction with spline  Overview                 If motion is carried out without spline, override reduction takes effect before                          workspace limits and at Cartesian velocity limits. If motion is carried out with                          spline, override reduction also affects axis-specific velocity limits.  Override reduction has an effect …                                              Without         With spline                                                                                  spline  before workspace            Cartesian  limits                              Axis-specific  (in T2, AUT and  AUT EXT modes)  on space-specific           Cartesian space  velocity                              Axis-specific space  on velocity limits          Cartesian velocity                                  Maximum velocity (not space-depen-                                   dent)                                  Reduced velocity                                  Reduced velocity for T1                              Axis velocity                                  Maximum velocity (valid globally for ev-                                   ery axis)                                  Reduced velocity                                  Maximum velocity for T1  Spline is a motion type that is suitable for particularly complex, curved paths.                          Such paths can also be generated using approximated LIN and CIRC motions,                          but splines have advantages, however.                          The advantages of spline include:                                 The path always remains the same, irrespective of the override setting, ve-                                  locity or acceleration.                                 Circles and tight radii are executed with great precision.                          It is advisable to use spline for optimal override reduction, e.g. in the case of                          frequent motion along the workspace limits.  Information about motion programming with spline is contained in the                                      “Operating and Programming Instructions for System Integrators”.    7.8.2     Examples of override reduction with spline  Changing                 A change of workspace is carried out from one Cartesian workspace to anoth- workspace                er Cartesian workspace with a lower space-specific velocity vmax.                          The following preconditions are met:                          System variables:                                 $SR_VEL_RED = TRUE   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                               115 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2      $SR_OV_RED = 80                                       Safety configuration:                                          Safe monitoring is active.                                          At least one tool sphere on the active tool is monitored.                                          The workspace with the lower space-specific velocity vmax is switched to                                           active (permanently for preference).                                          The space-specific velocity vmax is valid if the workspace is not violated.                                       With spline (red line), override reduction reduces the Cartesian velocity at the                                       safe TCP of the active tool in good time in the old workspace and moves into                                       the new workspace with the lower space-specific velocity.                                       Without spline (blue line), the Cartesian velocity is reduced in the old work-                                       space, but the override reduction function is not usually triggered early                                       enough. The lower space-specific velocity of the new workspace has not yet                                       been reached at the workspace limit and the robot stops with a safety stop 0.     Fig. 7-24: Changing to a workspace with a lower vmax  1   Cartesian workspace with vmax = 1,000 mm/s,                                               reduced to 800 mm/s                                           2   Cartesian workspace with vmax = 500 mm/s,                                               reduced to 400 mm/s  Due to override reduction with $SR_OV_RED = 80, a maximum of 80                                                percent of the configured space-specific velocity vmax is reached in                                                the workspaces.  Moving into a             A Cartesian protected space is configured into which the robot may not move.             protected space           If the robot approaches the protected space, override reduction is triggered                                       and reduces the velocity. If the robot wishes to enter the protected space, a                                       safety stop 0 is triggered at the workspace limit.                                       The following preconditions are met:                                       System variables:                                          $SR_WORKSPACE_RED = TRUE                                       Safety configuration:                                          Safe monitoring is active.                                          The function Stop at boundaries is active.                                          At least one tool sphere on the active tool is monitored.                                          The protected space is switched to active.                                       With spline (red line), override reduction reduces the Cartesian velocity at the                                       safe TCP of the active tool to a value that roughly corresponds to a program   116 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                    7 Start-up and configuration   override of 1% while it is still in the permissible range. The robot enters the                          Cartesian protected space with this velocity and is stopped with a safety                          stop 0.                          Without spline (blue line), the Cartesian velocity is reduced while in the per-                          missible range, but the override reduction function is not usually triggered ear-                          ly enough. The robot enters the Cartesian protected space at a higher velocity                          than with spline. Here, once again, the robot stops with a safety stop 0, but the                          braking reaction is more abrupt and the stopping distance greater.     Fig. 7-25: Moving into a protected space  1   Permissible range                    2    Cartesian protected space   7.8.3     Variables for override reduction in $CUSTOM.DAT  The variables for override reduction can be modified in the $CUSTOM.DAT                          file, in a KRL program or via the variable correction function. If a variable is                          modified, an advance run stop is triggered.  Variable                                   Description  $SR_VEL_RED                                Override reduction for the velocity                                             TRUE = override reduction is activated.                                             FALSE = override reduction is not activated.                                             Default: TRUE  $SR_OV_RED                                 Reduction factor for override reduction as a percentage                                             The currently monitored velocity limit is reduced to this per-                                             centage value.                                                10 … 95 %                                             Default: 75 %  $SR_WORKSPACE_RED                          Override reduction for monitoring spaces                                             TRUE = override reduction is activated.                                             FALSE = override reduction is not activated.                                             Default: TRUE   7.9       Safety acceptance overview  SafeOperation must not be put into operation until the safety acceptance pro-                          cedure has been completed successfully. For successful safety acceptance,                          the points in the checklists must be completed fully and confirmed in writing.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             117 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    The completed checklists, confirmed in writing, must be kept as doc-                                               umentary evidence.  Safety acceptance must be carried out in the following cases:                                          Following initial start-up or recommissioning of the industrial robot                                          After a change to the industrial robot                                          After a change to the safety configuration                                          After a software update, e.g. of the system software                                           Safety acceptance after a software update is only necessary if the check-                                           sum of the safety configuration changes as a result of the update.  The safety configuration must be archived and the change log                                               checked after every modification. It is also advisable to print out the                                               data set containing the safety parameters using WorkVisual.  The following checklists can be found in the Appendix:                                          Checklist for robot and system                                           (>>> 11.1.2 "Checklist for robot and system" Page 171)                                          Checklist for safety functions                                           (>>> 11.1.3 "Checklist for safety functions" Page 172)                                          Checklist for Cartesian velocity monitoring functions                                           (>>> 11.1.4 "Checklist for Cartesian velocity monitoring functions"                                           Page 175)                                          Checklist for axis-specific velocity monitoring functions                                           (>>> 11.1.5 "Checklist for axis-specific velocity monitoring functions"                                           Page 176)                                          Checklist for safe operational stop for axis groups                                           (>>> 11.1.6 "Checklist for safe operational stop for axis groups"                                           Page 180)                                          Checklist for cell area                                           (>>> 11.1.7 "Checklist for cell area" Page 182)                                          Checklist for Cartesian monitoring spaces                                           (>>> 11.1.8 "Checklist for Cartesian monitoring spaces" Page 183)                                          Checklist for axis-specific monitoring spaces                                           (>>> 11.1.9 "Checklist for axis-specific monitoring spaces" Page 185)                                          Checklist for safe tools                                           (>>> 11.1.10 "Checklist for safe tools" Page 190)   7.10      Checking that the safety functions are functioning correctly  The configured velocity limits, the limits of the monitoring spaces and the                                       space-specific velocities must be checked with override reduction deactivated.                                       For this, the following variables must be set to FALSE in $CUSTOM.DAT:                                          $SR_VEL_RED                                          $SR_WORKSPACE_RED                                       To check the configured limits, the space and velocity limits are deliberately                                       exceeded by means of test programs. If the safety configuration stops the ro-                                       bot, the limits are correctly configured.                                       If the robot is stopped by the safety controller, a message with message num-                                       ber 15xxx is displayed. If no message is displayed, or if a message from a dif-                                       ferent number range is displayed, the safety controller must be checked.   118 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                  7 Start-up and configuration   7.10.1    Testing Cartesian velocity limits  (>>> 11.1.4 "Checklist for Cartesian velocity monitoring functions" Page 175)  Description              The following Cartesian velocities must be tested:                              Reduced Cartesian velocity for T1                              Reduced Cartesian velocity                              Global maximum Cartesian velocity  Precondition                 Override reduction is deactivated.  The following procedure must be followed exactly!   Procedure                1. Create a test program in which the Cartesian velocity is to be exceeded                             deliberately, e.g. configured with 1000 mm/s, moved at 1100 mm/s.  When testing the Cartesian velocity on a KL, the linear unit must also                                    be moved.  2. To test the reduced Cartesian velocity for T1, execute the test program in                             operating mode T1.                          3. To test the reduced Cartesian velocity and the maximum Cartesian veloc-                             ity, execute the test program in operating mode T2.  Death, serious injuries or major damage to property may                                               occur. If a program is executed in test mode T2, the op-                           erator must be in a position outside the danger zone.   7.10.2    Testing axis-specific velocity limits  (>>> 11.1.5 "Checklist for axis-specific velocity monitoring functions"                          Page 176)  Description              The following axis-specific velocity limits must be tested:                              Maximum axis velocity for T1                              Reduced axis velocity                              Maximum axis velocity (valid globally for every axis)  It is only necessary to test the global maximum axis velocity if an axis                                   must not exceed a defined velocity. If the global maximum axis veloc-                                   ity is only to limit the minimum axis-specific protected space, no test                           is required.  Precondition                 Override reduction is deactivated.  Procedure                Testing linear axes:  The following procedure must be followed exactly!  1. Create a test program in which the axis velocity is exceeded deliberately,                             e.g. KL configured with 1000 mm/s, moved at 1100 mm/s.                          2. To test the maximum axis velocity for T1, execute the test program in op-                             erating mode T1.                          3. To test the reduced axis velocity and the global maximum axis velocity, ex-                             ecute the test program in operating mode T2.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           119 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Death, serious injuries or major damage to property may                                                           occur. If a program is executed in test mode T2, the op-                                       erator must be in a position outside the danger zone.  Testing rotational axes:  The following procedure must be followed exactly!  1. Look up the maximum axis velocity Vmax in the data sheet of the robot                                          used.                                       2. Create a test program in which the axis velocity is to be exceeded deliber-                                          ately, e.g. axis A1 configured with 190°/s, moved at 200°/s.                                       3. Calculate axis velocity $VEL_AXIS[x].                                              (>>> "Calculation of $VEL_AXIS" Page 120)                                       4. Enter the axis velocity $VEL_AXIS[x] in the test program.                                       5. To test the maximum axis velocity for T1, execute the test program in op-                                          erating mode T1.                                       6. To test the reduced axis velocity and the maximum axis velocity, execute                                          the test program in operating mode T2.  Death, serious injuries or major damage to property may                                                           occur. If a program is executed in test mode T2, the op-                                       erator must be in a position outside the danger zone.  Calculation of            The axis velocity $VEL_AXIS[x] is calculated using the following formula:             $VEL_AXIS                 $VEL_AXIS[x] = (VTest / Vmax) * 100 = (200 °/s / 360 °/s) * 100 = 56  Element          Description                                        x                Number of the axis                                        Vtest            Test velocity                                                         Unit: °/s                                        Vmax             Maximum axis velocity                                                         Unit: °/s  The calculated axis velocity $VEL_AXIS[x] is entered in the test program:                                        ...                                        PTP {A1 -30}                                        HALT                                        $VEL_AXIS[1] = 56                                        PTP {A1 30}                                        ...    7.10.3    Testing Cartesian monitoring spaces  (>>> 11.1.8 "Checklist for Cartesian monitoring spaces" Page 183)                                       (>>> 11.1.7 "Checklist for cell area" Page 182)  Description               The configuration of the boundaries and the space-specific velocity must be                                       checked. If “Stop at boundaries” is not configured, an alarm space is used for                                       this.                                       The space surfaces can have any orientation. The robot must be moved to                                       each of the 6 space surfaces of a Cartesian monitoring space at 3 different                                       points to check whether the limits have been programmed correctly. An excep-    120 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                  7 Start-up and configuration   tion is made here for space surfaces that cannot be addressed due to circum-                          stances in the system.                          The cell area is a Cartesian monitoring space and is tested in the same way.                          Depending on the configuration, the cell area consists of 5, 6 or more space                          surfaces. Each addressable space surface must be addressed at 2 different                          points to check whether the limits have been programmed correctly.     Fig. 7-26: Moving to space surfaces  Precondition                 Override reduction is deactivated.  Procedure                Testing space limits:  The following procedure must be followed exactly!  1. Create a test program in which all positions addressed for checking the                             space surfaces are taught.                          2. Execute test program in T1 mode.  When testing a Cartesian monitoring space on a KL, the linear unit                                    must also be moved. It must be ensured that the monitoring space                                    moves with the linear unit and comes to a standstill.  Testing the space-specific velocity:  The following procedure must be followed exactly!  1. Create a test program in which the space-specific velocity is deliberately                             exceeded, either inside or outside the monitoring space, e.g. 180 mm/s                             configured, moved at 200 mm/s.                          2. Execute test program in T2 mode.  Death, serious injuries or major damage to property may                                               occur. If a program is executed in test mode T2, the op-                           erator must be in a position outside the danger zone.   7.10.4    Testing axis-specific monitoring spaces  (>>> 11.1.9 "Checklist for axis-specific monitoring spaces" Page 185)  Description              The configuration of the boundaries and the space-specific velocity must be                          checked. If “Stop at boundaries” is not configured, an alarm space is used for                          this.  Precondition                 Override reduction is deactivated.  Procedure                Testing space limits:  The following procedure must be followed exactly!    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                           121 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2      Jog each axis (that is to be monitored) once to the upper and lower bound-                                           aries of the monitoring space in T1 mode using the jog keys or Space                                           Mouse.                                       Testing the space-specific velocity:  The following procedure must be followed exactly!  1. Create a test program in which the space-specific velocity is deliberately                                          exceeded, either inside or outside the monitoring space, e.g. 180 mm/s                                          configured, moved at 200 mm/s.                                       2. Execute test program in T2 mode.  Death, serious injuries or major damage to property may                                                           occur. If a program is executed in test mode T2, the op-                                       erator must be in a position outside the danger zone.   7.10.5    Testing the safe operational stop for an axis group  (>>> 11.1.6 "Checklist for safe operational stop for axis groups" Page 180)  Forces acting on the robot in the production process may result in a                                              violation of the safe operational stop, e.g. when loading a workpiece                                              into a gripper. To remedy this, the position tolerance for the affected                                       axis must be increased.  Precondition                 Operating mode T1  The following procedure must be followed exactly!   Procedure                 1. Activate safe operational stop for the axis group.                                       2. Jog the first axis in the axis group in the positive or negative direction using                                          the jog keys and with a jog override of 1%.                                           A robot stop must be triggered (safety stop 0).                                       3. Deactivate safe operational stop for the axis group and reactivate it.                                       4. Repeat steps 2 to 3 to test additional axes of the axis group.   7.11      Activating a new safety configuration  Description               If the safety configuration is updated by transferring a project from WorkVisual                                       to the robot controller or by restoring an archive, the safety controller signals                                       that the checksum of the safety configuration is incorrect.                                       The safety maintenance technician must check the new safety configuration                                       on the robot controller and is responsible for ensuring that the correct safety                                       configuration is activated. The displayed checksum must match the expected                                       checksum from the checklist for safety functions.                                       (>>> 11.1.3 "Checklist for safety functions" Page 172)                                       A new safety configuration can also be activated by the safety recovery tech-                                       nician. The safety recovery technician requires the 8-digit activation code of                                       the safety configuration for this. The correct activation code must be commu-                                       nicated by the safety maintenance technician.  Precondition                 User group “Safety recovery” or “Safety maintenance”  Procedure                 1. Select Configuration > Safety configuration in the main menu.    122 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                      7 Start-up and configuration   The safety configuration checks whether there are any relevant deviations                               between the robot controller and the safety controller. The Troubleshoot-                               ing wizard window is opened.                          2. A description of the problem and a list of possible causes is displayed. Se-                             lect the cause from the list, e.g. restoration of an archive.                          3. Press Activate to activate the updated safety configuration on the robot                             controller.                          4. Only in the user group “Safety Recovery”: enter the activation code and                             press Activate again.   7.12      Deactivating safe monitoring  If safe monitoring is deactivated, the configured safety                                                  monitoring functions are inactive.  Description              The following monitoring functions are part of the standard safety configura-                          tion and always active. This means that these monitoring functions remain ac-                          tive when safe monitoring is deactivated:                              Monitoring of the braking time                              Monitoring of the maximum axis velocity in T1                              Monitoring of the axis positions during a global safe operational stop (all                               axes)  Precondition                 User group “Safety maintenance”                              Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. Open the safety configuration.                          2. Press Global parameters.                          3. Remove the check mark from Safe monitoring.                          4. Click on Save and answer the request for confirmation with Yes.                               The robot controller is automatically reinitialized.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                               123 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     124 / 205                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                               8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   8            Interfaces to the higher-level controller t     f                           The robot controller can communicate with the higher-level controller, e.g. a                             PLC, via the Ethernet safety interface (PROFIsafe or CIP Safety) or via the s                             discrete safety interface for safety options (X13 via Extended SIB). t     The safe I/Os of the Ethernet safety interface are permanently assigned to the                             safety monitoring functions of SafeOperation: input and output bytes 2 to 7.                             (Input and output bytes 0 to 1 are assigned to the standard safety functions.)                             The safe I/Os of the discrete safety interface only offer a reduced range of sig-                             nals.  If the interface X13 (Extended SIB) is used, the relay outputs of the                                      Standard SIB and Extended SIB must be checked cyclically. The                                      checking instructions are contained in the robot controller operating                              instructions.  Further information about Extended SIB and interface X13 can be                                      found in the operating or assembly instructions for the robot controller                                      and in the Optional Interfaces assembly and operating instructions                              for the robot controller.   8.1          Safety functions via Ethernet safety interface  Description                 The exchange of safety-relevant signals between the controller and the sys-                             tem is carried out via the Ethernet safety interface (e.g. PROFIsafe or CIP                             Safety). The assignment of the input and output states within the Ethernet                             safety interface protocol are listed below. In addition, non-safety-oriented in-                             formation from the safety controller is sent to the non-safe section of the high-                             er-level controller for the purpose of diagnosis and control.  Reserved bits               Reserved safe inputs can be pre-assigned by a PLC with the values 0 or 1. In                             both cases, the manipulator will move. If a safety function is assigned to a re-                             served input (e.g. in the case of a software update) and if this input is preset                             with the value 0, then the manipulator either does not move or comes unex-                             pectedly to a standstill.  KUKA recommends pre-assignment of the reserved inputs with 1. If                                     a reserved input has a new safety function assigned to it, and the in-                                     put is not used by the customer’s PLC, the safety function is not acti-                              vated. This prevents the safety controller from unexpectedly stopping the                              manipulator.  Input byte 0                                 Bit      Signal       Description                                  0       RES          Reserved 1                                                       The value 1 must be assigned to the input.                                  1       NHE          Input for external Emergency Stop                                                       0 = external E-STOP is active                                                       1 = external E-STOP is not active                                  2       BS           Operator safety                                                       0 = operator safety is not active, e.g. safety gate open                                                       1 = operator safety is active     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                  125 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Bit   Signal   Description                                      3     QBS      Acknowledgement of operator safety                                                     Precondition for acknowledgment of operator safety                                                     is the signal "Operator safety active" set in the BS bit.                                                     Note: If the “BS” signal is acknowledged by the sys-                                                     tem, this must be specified under Hardware options                                                     in the safety configuration. Information is contained in                                                     the Operating and Programming Instructions for Sys-                                                     tem Integrators.                                                     0 = operator safety has not been acknowledged                                                     Edge 0 ->1 = operator safety has been acknowledged                                      4     SHS1     Safety STOP 1 (all axes)                                                        FF (motion enable) is set to 0.                                                        Voltage US2 is switched off.                                                        AF (drives enable) is set to 0 after 1.5 s.                                                     Cancelation of this function does not require acknowl-                                                     edgement.                                                     This function is not permissible for the EMERGENCY                                                     STOP function.                                                     0 = safety stop is active                                                     1 = safety stop is not active                                      5     SHS2     Safety STOP 2 (all axes)                                                        FF (motion enable) is set to 0.                                                        Voltage US2 is switched off.                                                     Cancelation of this function does not require acknowl-                                                     edgement.                                                     This function is not permissible for the EMERGENCY                                                     STOP function.                                                     0 = safety stop is active                                                     1 = safety stop is not active                                      6     RES      -                                      7     RES      -     126 / 205                                                    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                             8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   Input byte 1                              Bit      Signal       Description                               0       US2          Supply voltage US2 (signal for switching the second                                                    supply voltage, US2, without battery backup)                                                    If this output is not used, it should be set to 0.                                                    0 = switch off US2                                                    1 = Switch on US2                                                    Note: Whether and how input US2 is used must be                                                    specified under Hardware options in the safety con-                                                    figuration. Information is contained in the Operating                                                    and Programming Instructions for System Integra-                                                    tors.                               1       SBH          Safe operational stop (all axes)                                                    Prerequisite: All axes are stationary                                                    Cancelation of this function does not require acknowl-                                                    edgement.                                                    This function is not permissible for the EMERGENCY                                                    STOP function.                                                    0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                    1 = safe operational stop is not active.                               2       RES          Reserved 11                                                    The value 1 must be assigned to the input.                               3       RES          Reserved 12                                                    The value 1 must be assigned to the input.                               4       RES          Reserved 13                                                    The value 1 must be assigned to the input.                               5       RES          Reserved 14                                                    The value 1 must be assigned to the input.                               6       RES          Reserved 15                                                    The value 1 must be assigned to the input.                               7       SPA          System Powerdown Acknowledge                                                    The system confirms that it has received the power-                                                    down signal. A second after the “SP” (System Power-                                                    down) signal has been set by the controller, the                                                    requested action is executed, without the need for                                                    confirmation from the PLC, and the controller shuts                                                    down.                                                    0 = confirmation is not active                                                    1 = confirmation is active     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                   127 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Output byte 0                                       Bit   Signal   Description                                       0     NHL      Local E-STOP (local E-STOP triggered)                                                      0 = local E-STOP is active                                                      1 = local E-STOP is not active                                       1     AF       Drives enable (the internal safety controller in the                                                      KRC has enabled the drives so that they can be                                                      switched on)                                                      0 = drives enable is not active (the robot controller                                                      must switch the drives off)                                                      1 = drives enable is active (the robot controller must                                                      switch the drives to servo-control)                                       2     FF       Motion enable (the internal safety controller in the                                                      KRC has enabled robot motions)                                                      0 = motion enable is not active (the robot controller                                                      must stop the current motion)                                                      1 = motion enable is active (the robot controller may                                                      trigger a motion)                                       3     ZS       One of the enabling switches is in the center position                                                      (enabling in test mode)                                                      0 = enabling is not active                                                      1 = enabling is active                                       4     PE       The signal “Peri enabled” is set to 1 (active) if the fol-                                                      lowing conditions are met:                                                         Drives are switched on.                                                         Safety controller motion enable signal present.                                                         The message “Operator safety open” must not be                                                          active.   5     AUT      The manipulator is in AUT or AUT EXT mode.                                                      0 = AUT or AUT EXT mode is not active                                                      1 = AUT or AUT EXT mode is active                                       6     T1       The manipulator is in Manual Reduced Velocity                                                      mode.                                                      0 = T1 mode is not active                                                      1 = T1 mode is active                                       7     T2       The manipulator is in Manual High Velocity mode.                                                      0 = T2 mode is not active                                                      1 = T2 mode is active     128 / 205                                                     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                               8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   Output byte 1                              Bit      Signal       Description                               0       NHE          External E-STOP has been triggered.                                                    0 = external E-STOP is active                                                    1 = external E-STOP is not active                               1       BSQ          Operator safety acknowledged                                                    0 = operator safety is not assured                                                    1 = operator safety is assured (input BS = 1 and, if                                                    configured, input QBS acknowledged)                               2       SHS1         Safety stop 1 (all axes)                                                    0 = Safety stop 1 is not active                                                    1 = Safety stop 1 is active (safe state reached)                               3       SHS2         Safety stop 2 (all axes)                                                    0 = Safety stop 2 is not active                                                    1 = Safety stop 2 is active (safe state reached)                               4       RES          Reserved 13                               5       RES          Reserved 14                               6       PSA          Safety interface active                                                    Precondition: An Ethernet interface must be installed                                                    on the controller, e.g. PROFINET or Ethernet/IP                                                    0 = safety interface is not active                                                    1 = safety interface is active                               7       SP           System Powerdown (controller will be shut down)                                                    One second after the SP signal has been set, the                                                    PSA output is reset by the robot controller, without                                                    confirmation from the PLC, and the controller is shut                                                    down.                                                    0 = controller on safety interface is active.                                                    1 = controller will be shut down   8.1.1     SafeOperation via Ethernet safety interface (optional)  Description              The components of the industrial robot move within the limits that have been                          configured and activated. The actual positions are continuously calculated and                          monitored against the safety parameters that have been set. The safety con-                          troller monitors the industrial robot by means of the safety parameters that                          have been set. If a component of the industrial robot violates a monitoring limit                          or a safety parameter, the manipulator and external axes (optional) are                          stopped. The Ethernet safety interface can be used, for example, to signal a                          violation of safety monitoring functions.                          In the case of the KR C4 compact robot controller, safety options such as Sa-                          feOperation are only available via the Ethernet safety interface from                          KSS/VSS 8.3 onwards.  Reserved bits            Reserved safe inputs can be pre-assigned by a PLC with the values 0 or 1. In                          both cases, the manipulator will move. If a safety function is assigned to a re-                          served input (e.g. in the case of a software update) and if this input is preset                          with the value 0, then the manipulator either does not move or comes unex-                          pectedly to a standstill.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                     129 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    KUKA recommends pre-assignment of the reserved inputs with 1. If                                              a reserved input has a new safety function assigned to it, and the in-                                              put is not used by the customer’s PLC, the safety function is not acti-                                       vated. This prevents the safety controller from unexpectedly stopping the                                       manipulator.  Input byte 2                                       Bit        Signal           Description                                       0          JR               Mastering test (input for the reference switch of                                                                   the mastering test)                                                                   0 = reference switch is active (actuated).                                                                   1 = reference switch is not active (not actu-                                                                   ated).                                       1          VRED             Reduced axis-specific and Cartesian velocity                                                                   (activation of reduced velocity monitoring)                                                                   0 = reduced velocity monitoring is active.                                                                   1 = reduced velocity monitoring is not active.                                       2…7        SBH1 … 6         Safe operational stop for axis group 1 ... 6                                                                   Assignment: Bit 2 = axis group 1 … bit 7 = axis                                                                   group 6                                                                   Signal for safe operational stop. The function                                                                   does not trigger a stop, it only activates the safe                                                                   standstill monitoring. Cancelation of this func-                                                                   tion does not require acknowledgement.                                                                   0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                                   1 = safe operational stop is not active.  Input byte 3              Bit        Signal           Description                                       0…7        RES              Reserved 25 ... 32                                                                   The value 1 must be assigned to the inputs.  Input byte 4              Bit        Signal           Description                                       0…7        UER1 … 8         Monitoring spaces 1 … 8                                                                   Assignment: Bit 0 = monitoring space 1 … bit 7                                                                   = monitoring space 8                                                                   0 = monitoring space is active.                                                                   1 = monitoring space is not active.  Input byte 5              Bit        Signal           Description                                       0…7        UER9 … 16        Monitoring spaces 9 … 16                                                                   Assignment: Bit 0 = monitoring space 9 … bit 7                                                                   = monitoring space 16                                                                   0 = monitoring space is active.                                                                   1 = monitoring space is not active.     130 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                               8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   Input byte 6                            Bit         Signal           Description                            0…7         WZ1 … 8          Tool selection 1 … 8                                                         Assignment: Bit 0 = tool 1 … bit 7 = tool 8                                                         0 = tool is not active.                                                         1 = tool is active.                                                         Exactly one tool must be selected at all times.  Input byte 7               Bit         Signal           Description                            0…7         WZ9 … 16         Tool selection 9 … 16                                                         Assignment: Bit 0 = tool 9 … bit 7 = tool 16                                                         0 = tool is not active.                                                         1 = tool is active.                                                         Exactly one tool must be selected at all times.  Output byte 2              Bit         Signal           Description                            0           SO               Safety option active                                                         Activation status of the safety option                                                         0 = safety option is not active                                                         1 = safety option is active                            1           RR               Manipulator referenced                                                         Mastering test display                                                         0 = mastering test required.                                                         1 = mastering test performed successfully.                            2           JF               Mastering error                                                         Space monitoring is deactivated because at                                                         least one axis is not mastered.                                                         0 = mastering error. Space monitoring has been                                                         deactivated.                                                         1 = no error.                            3           VRED             Reduced axis-specific and Cartesian velocity                                                         (activation status of reduced velocity monitor-                                                         ing)                                                         0 = reduced velocity monitoring is not active.                                                         1 = reduced velocity monitoring is active.                            4…7         SBH1 … 4         Activation status of safe operational stop for                                                         axis group 1 ... 4                                                         Assignment: Bit 4 = axis group 1 … bit 7 = axis                                                         group 4                                                         0 = safe operational stop is not active.                                                         1 = safe operational stop is active.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                     131 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Output byte 3                                       Bit   Signal     Description                                       0…1   SBH5 … 6   Activation status of safe operational stop for                                                        axis group 5 ... 6                                                        Assignment: Bit 0 = axis group 5 … bit 1 = axis                                                        group 6                                                        0 = safe operational stop is not active.                                                        1 = safe operational stop is active.                                       2     SOS        Safe Operation Stop                                                        0 = a safety function has triggered a stop. The                                                        output remains in the “0” state for at least                                                        200 ms.                                                        1 = none of the safety functions has triggered a                                                        stop.                                                        Note: The output SOS is available in System                                                        Software 8.3 or higher. In System Software 8.2                                                        or lower, bit 2 is a spare bit.                                       3…7   RES        Reserved 28 ... 32  Output byte 4                                       Bit   Signal     Description                                       0…7   MR1 … 8    Alarm space 1 … 8                                                        Assignment: Bit 0 = alarm space 1 (associated                                                        monitoring space 1) … bit 7 = alarm space 8                                                        (associated monitoring space 8)                                                        0 = monitoring space is violated.                                                        1 = monitoring space is not violated.                                                        Note: An inactive monitoring space is consid-                                                        ered to be violated by default, i.e. in this case                                                        the associated safe output MRx has the state                                                        “0”.  Output byte 5                                       Bit   Signal     Description                                       0…7   MR9 … 16   Alarm space 9 … 16                                                        Assignment: Bit 0 = alarm space 9 (associated                                                        monitoring space 9) … bit 7 = alarm space 16                                                        (associated monitoring space 16)                                                        0 = monitoring space is violated.                                                        1 = monitoring space is not violated.                                                        Note: An inactive monitoring space is consid-                                                        ered to be violated by default, i.e. in this case                                                        the associated safe output MRx has the state                                                        “0”.  Output byte 6                                       Bit   Signal     Description                                       0…7   RES        Reserved 49 ... 56  Output byte 7             Bit   Signal     Description                                       0…7   RES        Reserved 57 ... 64    132 / 205                                                 Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                           8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   8.1.2     Diagnostic signals via Ethernet interface  Description              Some signal states are extended to ensure that they can be detected reliably.                          In the case of extended signal states, the minimum duration of the extension                          is specified in square brackets. Values are specified in milliseconds, e.g. [200].  The diagnostic signals available via the Ethernet interface are not                                    safe signals and may only be used for diagnostic purposes.   Output byte 0                            Bit         Signal           Description                            0           DG               Validity for non-safety-oriented signals and data                                                         on this interface                                                         0 = data are not valid                                                         1 = data are valid                            1           IFS              Internal error in safety controller                                                         0 = no error                                                         1 = error [200]                            2           FF               Motion enable                                                         0 = motion enable not active [200]                                                         1 = motion enable active                            3           AF               Drives enable                                                         0 = drives enable not active [200]                                                         1 = drives enable active                            4           IBN              Start-up mode                                                         Start-up mode enables jogging of the manipula-                                                         tor without a higher-level controller.                                                         0 = Start-up mode is not active.                                                         1 = Start-up mode is active.                            5           US2              Peripheral voltage                                                         0 = US2 switched off                                                         1 = US2 switched on                            6…7         RES              Reserved  Output byte 1                            Bit         Signal           Description                            0           SO               Activation status of the safety option                                                         0 = safety option is not active                                                         1 = safety option is active                            1           JF               Mastering error (optional)                                                         0 = no error                                                         1 = mastering error, space monitoring deacti-                                                         vated.                            2           VRED             Reduced velocity (optional)                                                         0 = reduced velocity monitoring is not active.                                                         1 = reduced velocity monitoring is active.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                 133 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Bit   Signal   Description                                       3     VKUE     At least one Cartesian velocity limit exceeded                                                      (optional)                                                      0 = no error                                                      1 = velocity exceeded [200]                                       4     VAUE     At least one axis velocity limit exceeded                                                      (optional)                                                      0 = no error                                                      1 = velocity exceeded [200]                                       5     ZBUE     Cell area exceeded (optional)                                                      0 = no error                                                      1 = cell area exceeded [200]                                       6…7   RES      Reserved  Output byte 2                                       Bit   Signal   Description                                       0     SHS1     Safety stop (all axes) STOP 0 or STOP 1                                                      0 = safety stop is not active.                                                      1 = safety stop is active.                                       1     ESV      External stop request violated                                                      Safe operational stop SBH1, SBH2 or safety                                                      stop SHS1, SHS2 violated                                                      Braking ramp was not maintained or a moni-                                                      tored axis has moved.                                                      0 = no error                                                      1 = violated                                       2     SHS2     Safety stop 2                                                      0 = safety stop is not active.                                                      1 = safety stop is active.                                       3     SBH1     Safe operational stop (axis group 1) (optional)                                                      0 = safe operational stop is not active.                                                      1 = safe operational stop is active.                                       4     SBH2     Safe operational stop (axis group 2) (optional)                                                      0 = safe operational stop is not active.                                                      1 = safe operational stop is active.                                       5     WFK      Tool error (no tool) (optional)                                                      0 = no error                                                      1 = no tool selected.                                       6     WFME     Tool error (more than one tool) (optional)                                                      0 = no error                                                      1 = more than one tool selected.                                       7     RES      Reserved     134 / 205                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                            8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   Output byte 3                            Bit         Signal           Description                            0           JR               Mastering test (optional)                                                         0 = mastering test is not active.                                                         1 = mastering test is active.                            1           RSF              Reference switch error (optional)                                                         0 = reference switch OK                                                         1 = reference switch defective [200]                            2           JRA              Mastering test request (optional)                                                         0 = mastering test not requested.                                                         1 = mastering test requested.                            3           JRF              Mastering test failed (optional)                                                         0 = mastering test OK.                                                         1 = mastering test failed.                            4           RS               Reference stop (optional)                                                         Reference run is only possible in T1 mode.                                                         0 = no error                                                         1 = reference stop due to impermissible operat-                                                         ing mode                            5           RIA              Referencing interval (optional)                                                         0 = no reminder                                                         1 = reminder interval expired [200]                            6…7         RES              Reserved  Output byte 4                            Bit         Signal           Description                            0…7         WZNR             Tool number (8-bit word) (optional)                                                         0 = error (see WFK and WFME)                                                         1 = tool 1                                                         2 = tool 2, etc.  Output byte 5              Bit         Signal           Description                            0…7         UER1 … 8         Monitoring spaces 1 … 8 (optional)                                                         Assignment: Bit 0 = monitoring space 1 … bit 7                                                         = monitoring space 8                                                         0 = monitoring space is not active.                                                         1 = monitoring space is active.  Output byte 6              Bit         Signal           Description                            0…7         UER9 … 16        Monitoring spaces 9 … 16 (optional)                                                         Assignment: Bit 0 = monitoring space 9 … bit 7                                                         = monitoring space 16                                                         0 = monitoring space is not active.                                                         1 = monitoring space is active.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                  135 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Output byte 7                                        Bit        Signal           Description                                        0…7        UERV1 … 8        Stop in the event of a violation of monitoring                                                                    spaces 1 … 8 (optional)                                                                    Assignment: Bit 0 = monitoring space 1 … bit 7                                                                    = monitoring space 8                                                                    0 = monitoring space is not violated, or monitor-                                                                    ing space is violated but “Stop at boundaries”                                                                    has not been configured.                                                                    1 = monitoring space is violated and robot stops                                                                    with a safety stop [200]. Precondition: “Stop at                                                                    boundaries” has been configured.  Output byte 8              Bit        Signal           Description                                        0…7        UERV9 … 16       Stop in the event of a violation of monitoring                                                                    spaces 9 … 16 (optional)                                                                    Assignment: Bit 0 = monitoring space 9 … bit 7                                                                    = monitoring space 16                                                                    0 = monitoring space is not violated, or monitor-                                                                    ing space is violated but “Stop at boundaries”                                                                    has not been configured.                                                                    1 = monitoring space is violated and robot stops                                                                    with a safety stop [200]. Precondition: “Stop at                                                                    boundaries” has been configured.   8.2       SafeOperation via interface X13  If interface X13 is used, tool 1 is always active. The tool cannot be ac-                                               tivated via a safe input. An automated, safely monitored tool change                                               is thus not possible.  Further information about connection to interface X13 and the re-                                               quired safety measures can be found in the Optional Interfaces as-                                               sembly and operating instructions for the robot controller.  Inputs                    Some of the inputs can be configured in WorkVisual. By default, the configu-                                       rable inputs are used to activate the monitoring space UER13 … UER16. Al-                                       ternatively, these inputs can be configured to activate the safe operational stop                                       SBH3 … SBH6.  It is not permissible to assign an input twice, i.e. to use it simultane-                                               ously for activating a monitoring space and a safe operational stop.     136 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                           8 Interfaces to the higher-level contr...   X13 Pin           Signal          Description                           1, 2 (A)          VRED            Reduced axis-specific and Cartesian veloc-                                                             ity (activation of reduced velocity monitor-                           19, 20 (B)                                                             ing)                                                             0 = reduced velocity monitoring is active.                                                             1 = reduced velocity monitoring is not                                                             active.                           3, 4 (A)          UER12           Monitoring space 12                           21, 22 (B)                        0 = monitoring space is active.                                                             1 = monitoring space is not active.                           5, 6 (A)          UER13           Monitoring space 13 (default)                           23, 24 (B)                        0 = monitoring space is active.                                                             1 = monitoring space is not active.                                             SBH3            Safe operational stop (axis group 3)                                                             0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                             1 = safe operational stop is not active.                           7, 8 (A)          UER14           Monitoring space 14 (default)                           25, 26 (B)                        0 = monitoring space is active.                                                             1 = monitoring space is not active.                                             SBH4            Safe operational stop (axis group 4)                                                             0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                             1 = safe operational stop is not active.                           9, 10 (A)         UER15           Monitoring space 15 (default)                           27, 28 (B)                        0 = monitoring space is active.                                                             1 = monitoring space is not active.                                             SBH5            Safe operational stop (axis group 5)                                                             0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                             1 = safe operational stop is not active.                           11, 12 (A)        UER16           Monitoring space 16 (default)                           29, 30 (B)                        0 = monitoring space is active.                                                             1 = monitoring space is not active.                                             SBH6            Safe operational stop (axis group 6)                                                             0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                             1 = safe operational stop is not active.                           13, 14 (A)        SBH1            Safe operational stop (axis group 1)                           31, 32 (B)                        0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                             1 = safe operational stop is not active.                           15, 16 (A)        SBH2            Safe operational stop (axis group 2)                           33, 34 (B)                        0 = safe operational stop is active.                                                             1 = safe operational stop is not active.  The signal for the safe operational stop does not trigger a stop, it only                                   activates the safe standstill monitoring. Cancelation of this function                                   does not require acknowledgement.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                  137 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Outputs                                             An inactive monitoring space is considered to be violated by default,                                             i.e. in this case the associated safe output MRx has the state “0”.   X13 Pin       Signal          Description                                       37, 38 (A)    MR1             Alarm space 1 (associated monitoring                                                                     space 1)                                       55, 56 (B)                                                                     0 = space is violated.                                                                     1 = space is not violated.                                       39, 40 (A)    MR2             Alarm space 2 (associated monitoring                                                                     space 2)                                       57, 58 (B)                                                                     0 = space is violated.                                                                     1 = space is not violated.                                       41, 42 (A)    MR3             Alarm space 3 (associated monitoring                                                                     space 3)                                       59, 60 (B)                                                                     0 = space is violated.                                                                     1 = space is not violated.                                       43, 44 (A)    MR4             Alarm space 4 (associated monitoring                                                                     space 4)                                       61, 62 (B)                                                                     0 = space is violated.                                                                     1 = space is not violated.                                       45, 46 (A)    MR5             Alarm space 5 (associated monitoring                                                                     space 5)                                       63, 64 (B)                                                                     0 = space is violated.                                                                     1 = space is not violated.                                       47, 48 (A)    MR6             Alarm space 6 (associated monitoring                                                                     space 6)                                       65, 66 (B)                                                                     0 = space is violated.                                                                     1 = space is not violated.                                       49, 50 (A)    SO              Activation status of the safety option                                       67, 68 (B)                    0 = safety option is not active                                                                     1 = safety option is active                                       51, 52 (A)    RR              Manipulator referenced                                       69, 70 (B)                    Mastering test display                                                                     0 = mastering test required.                                                                     1 = mastering test performed successfully.     138 / 205                                                          Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     9 Diagnosis   9            Diagnosis  9.1 s              Displaying safe I/Os s     Procedure                   1. Select Diagnosis > Diagnostic monitor in the main menu.                             2. Select the Bus process data image[Name of bus/interface] module in the                                Module box.   9.2          Variables for diagnosis  Variable                                   Description     $SR_ACTIVETOOL                             Number of the active safe tool                                                   0: no safe tool or multiple safe tools are selected.                                                   1 … 16: Safe tool 1 … 16 is active.     $SR_AXISSPEED_OK                           Reduced axis acceleration exceeded                                                TRUE = axis velocity has not been exceeded.                                                FALSE = axis velocity has been exceeded.                                                The variable is set to FALSE when the excessive value is                                                detected and then set immediately back to TRUE.     $SR_CARTSPEED_OK                           Cartesian velocity exceeded                                                TRUE = Cartesian velocity has not been exceeded.                                                FALSE = Cartesian velocity has been exceeded.                                                The variable is set to FALSE when the excessive value is                                                detected and then set immediately back to TRUE.     $SR_DRIVES_ENABLE                          Enabling of the drives by the safety controller                                                TRUE = drives are enabled.                                                FALSE = drives are not enabled.     $SR_MOVE_ENABLE                            Enabling by the safety controller                                                TRUE = motion enable                                                FALSE = no motion enable     $SR_RANGE_ACTIVE[1]                        Activation status of monitoring spaces 1...16     …                                          TRUE = monitoring space is active.     $SR_RANGE_ACTIVE[16]                       FALSE = monitoring space is not active.     $SR_RANGE_OK[1]                            Violation of monitoring spaces 1...16     …                                          TRUE = monitoring space is not violated.     $SR_RANGE_OK[16]                           FALSE = monitoring space has been violated and the robot                                                has been stopped.                                                Note: The variable depends on whether a stop has been                                                configured for the monitoring space in the event of a viola-                                                tion. If no stop is configured, the variable is always TRUE.     $SR_SAFEMON_ACTIVE                         State of safe monitoring                                                TRUE = monitoring is activated.                                                FALSE = monitoring is not activated.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          139 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Variable                                   Description              $SR_SAFEOPSTOP_ACTIVE[Ind                  State of the safe operational stop              ex]                                                         TRUE = safe operational stop is activated.                                                         FALSE = safe operational stop is not activated.                                                         Index:                                                              1: state of the global safe operational stop (all axes)                                                               The global operational stop is a standard safety function                                                               of the Ethernet safety interface. (Input byte 1, bit 1, safe                                                               operational stop)                                                              2 … 7: state of the safe operational stop in relation to axis                                                               group 1 … 6 (safe operational stop 1 …safe operational                                                               stop 6)              $SR_SAFEOPSTOP_OK                          Violation of an externally activated operational stop                                                         TRUE = no violation                                                         FALSE = safe operational stop has been violated.              $SR_SAFEREDSPEED_ACTIVE                    State of the monitoring of the reduced velocity                                                         TRUE = monitoring is activated.                                                         FALSE = monitoring is not activated.   9.3       Outputs for space monitoring  In the following error situations, outputs that signal a space violation likewise                                       switch to the “violated” state (precondition: monitoring space is active.):                                            In the case of a Cartesian monitoring space, the Cartesian position is in-                                             valid. The Cartesian position is invalid if one of the robot axes has an in-                                             valid position. This applies in the following cases:                                                An axis is unmastered.                                                An encoder error has occurred.                                                A communication error has occurred.                                            In the case of an axis-specific monitoring space, the position of one of the                                             monitored axes is invalid. This applies in the following cases:                                                An axis is unmastered.                                                An encoder error has occurred.                                                A communication error has occurred.                                            In the case of a Cartesian monitoring space, no tool is selected or several                                             tools are selected simultaneously.                                       Signal states in error situations:  Output / variable                         Logic state                                           MRx (safe outputs)                        0                                           UERVx                                     1                                           $SR_RANGE_OK[x]                           0 (FALSE)     140 / 205                                                                 Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                 10 Messages   10           Messages s  s     10.1         Information about the messages s     The “Messages” chapter contains selected messages. It does not cover all the                             messages displayed in the message window.   10.2         System messages from module: CrossMeld (KSS)  10.2.1       KSS15016  Message code                    KSS15016     Message text                    Ackn.: Stop due to standstill monitoring violation     Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                     Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Safe operational stop violated (>>> Page 141)                                      Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 141)    Cause: Safe operational stop violated  Description                 At least one of the axes monitored for standstill has moved outside the config-                             ured position tolerance.   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description                 The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                          An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                    All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                     OK.   10.2.2       KSS15017  Message code                    KSS15017     Message text                    Ackn.: The braking ramp of the robot has been violated.     Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Short-circuit braking                                     Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Braking ramp for STOP 1 or safe operational stop not main-                                      tained (>>> Page 142)                                      Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 142)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                      141 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Cause: Braking ramp for STOP 1 or safe operational stop not maintained  Description               The robot controller has not triggered strong enough braking in the case of a                                       STOP 1 or a safe operational stop.   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description               The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                        An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                              All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                               OK.   10.2.3    KSS15018  Message code                     KSS15018              Message text                     Ackn.: Maximum Cartesian velocity in T1 mode exceeded              Message type                     Acknowledgement message    Effect                           Ramp stop                                               Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)                Cause: $SR_VEL_RED is FALSE (>>> Page 142)                                                Solution: Change value of the variable (>>> Page 142)       Cause: $SR_OV_RED set too high (>>> Page 143)                                                Solution: Change value of the variable (>>> Page 143)    Cause: $SR_VEL_RED is FALSE  Description               The variable $SR_VEL_RED is used to activate the override reduction for                                       monitored velocities. If override reduction is active, the velocity is automatical-                                       ly reduced so that the lowest currently monitored velocity limit is not exceeded.                                       This override reduction is deactivated if the variable is FALSE.  Further information on override reduction is contained in the assem-                                                  bly and operating instructions of the safety option.  The procedure for checking the current value of the variable is as fol-                                       lows:  Checking instruc-         1. In the main menu, select Display > Variable > Single.             tions                             The Variable display – Single window opens.                                       2. Enter the variable name in the Name box and confirm with the Enter key.                                          The current value of the variable is displayed.   Solution: Change value of the variable  Precondition                     “Expert” user group  Procedure                 1. In the main menu, select Display > Variable > Single.                                               The Variable display – Single window opens.   142 / 205                                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                               10 Messages   2. Enter the variable name in the Name box and confirm with the Enter key.                             The current value of the variable is displayed.                          3. Enter the new value in the New value box.                          4. Press the Set value button. The new value is displayed in the Current val-                             ue box.   Cause: $SR_OV_RED set too high  Description              The override reduction for monitored velocities is activated ($SR_VEL_RED =                          TRUE), but the value of the variable $SR_OV_RED is set too high. The lower                          the value of $SR_OV_RED, the more a monitored velocity limit is reduced by                          the override reduction.  Further information on override reduction is contained in the assem-                                      bly and operating instructions of the safety option.  The procedure for checking the value of the variable is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Display > Variable > Single. tions                            The Variable display – Single window opens.                          2. Enter the variable name in the Name box and confirm with the Enter key.                             The current value of the variable is displayed.   Solution: Change value of the variable  Precondition                    “Expert” user group  Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Display > Variable > Single.                                  The Variable display – Single window opens.                          2. Enter the variable name in the Name box and confirm with the Enter key.                             The current value of the variable is displayed.                          3. Enter the new value in the New value box.                          4. Press the Set value button. The new value is displayed in the Current val-                             ue box.   10.2.4    KSS15019  Message code                    KSS15019  Message text                    Ackn.: Maximum axis-specific velocity in T1 mode exceeded  Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Override for T1 too high (>>> Page 143)                                   Solution: Reduce jog or program override. (>>> Page 144)    Cause: Override for T1 too high  Description              The jog override (HOV) was too high for jogging or the program override                          (POV) was too high for program motion in T1 mode.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       143 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Solution: Reduce jog or program override.  Procedure                        Reduce the jog override or the program override for jogging in T1.   10.2.5    KSS15033  Message code                     KSS15033              Message text                     More then one tool activated in the safety controller              Message type                     Status message    Effect                           Ramp stop                                               Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.              Follow-up message                KSS15034 (>>> Page 144)   Possible cause(s)                Cause: More then one tool activated in the safety controller                                                (>>> Page 144)                                                Solution: Deactivate invalid tools (>>> Page 144)    Cause: More then one tool activated in the safety controller  Description               There is more than one tool activated in the safety controller. Only one safe                                       tool may be active.   Solution: Deactivate invalid tools  Procedure                        Deactivate invalid tools and activate only the safe tool that is currently be-                                               ing used.   10.2.6    KSS15034  Message code                     KSS15034              Message text                     Ackn.: More than one tool activated in the safety controller              Message type                     Acknowledgement message    Effect                           Ramp stop                                               Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.              Original message                 KSS15033 (>>> Page 144)   Possible cause(s)                Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.                                                (>>> Page 144)                                                Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 145)    Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.  Description               This follow-up message is displayed if the error cause of the original message                                       has been eliminated.     144 / 205                                                                  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                              10 Messages   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description              The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                       An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                 All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                  OK.   10.2.7    KSS15035  Message code                    KSS15035  Message text                    No tool activated in safety controller  Message type                    Status message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.  Follow-up message               KSS15036 (>>> Page 145)   Possible cause(s)               Cause: No tool activated in safety controller (>>> Page 145)                                   Solution: Activate safe tool (>>> Page 145)    Cause: No tool activated in safety controller  Description              There is no tool activated in the safety controller.   Solution: Activate safe tool  Procedure                       Activate the safe tool that is currently being used.  If KUKA.SafeRangeMonitoring is used, tool 1 must always be activat-                                      ed.    10.2.8    KSS15036  Message code                    KSS15036  Message text                    Ackn.: No tool activated in safety controller  Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.  Original message                KSS15035 (>>> Page 145)   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.                                   (>>> Page 146)                                   Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 146)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                      145 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.  Description               This follow-up message is displayed if the error cause of the original message                                       has been eliminated.   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description               The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                        An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                              All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                               OK.   10.2.9    KSS15037  Message code                        KSS15037              Message text                        Cell area exceeded              Message type                        Status message    Effect                              No braking reaction                                                  No interlock of motions or commands   Possible cause(s)                   Cause: Cell area exceeded (>>> Page 146)                                                   Solution: Move the robot out of the violated space: (>>> Page 146)    Cause: Cell area exceeded  Description               The active safe tool has left the cell area. There is a space violation.   Solution: Move the robot out of the violated space:  Description               The robot must be moved out of the violated space in T1 mode. No other op-                                       erating mode can be set until the robot has left the violated space.                                       If the space is violated in T1 mode, the acknowledgement message Ackn.:                                       Stop because workspace exceeded is additionally displayed.  Precondition                     Operating mode T1  Procedure                 1. When the acknowledgement message is displayed, confirm it with OK.                                       2. Press and hold down the enabling switch.                                       3. Move the robot out of the violated space:                                                    Using the jog keys (manual mode)                                                    Using the Start and Start backwards keys (program mode)   10.2.10 KSS15039  Message code                        KSS15039              Message text                        Ackn.: Maximum global Cartesian velocity exceeded              Message type                        Acknowledgement message     146 / 205                                                                  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                  10 Messages   Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Limit value for global maximum Cartesian velocity exceeded                                   (>>> Page 147)                                   Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 147)       Cause: Limit value for global maximum Cartesian velocity exceeded                                   (>>> Page 147)                                   Solution: Adapt the program in such a way that limit value is not                                   reached (>>> Page 148)    Cause: Limit value for global maximum Cartesian velocity exceeded  Description              The limit value defined in the safety configuration for the global maximum Car-                          tesian velocity was exceeded.                          Possible reasons:                                 An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value                                  other than that specified by the system integrator.                                 The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value to                                  be exceeded.                          The procedure for checking which value is configured for the parameter Car-                          tesian maximum velocity is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration. tions                            The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Press Global parameters. The global parameters are displayed.                          3. Search for the parameter and check the value.   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                    User group “Safety maintenance”                                 Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                  The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                          3. Save safety configuration.  Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                      must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                      bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    Cause: Limit value for global maximum Cartesian velocity exceeded  Description              The limit value defined in the safety configuration for the global maximum Car-                          tesian velocity was exceeded.                          Possible reasons:   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            147 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2          An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value                                               other than that specified by the system integrator.                                              The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value to                                               be exceeded.                                       The procedure for checking which value is configured for the parameter Car-                                       tesian maximum velocity is as follows:  Checking instruc-         1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.             tions                             The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                                       2. Press Global parameters. The global parameters are displayed.                                       3. Search for the parameter and check the value.   Solution: Adapt the program in such a way that limit value is not reached   10.2.11 KSS15040  Message code                        KSS15040              Message text                        Ackn.: Maximum global axis velocity exceeded              Message type                        Acknowledgement message    Effect                              Ramp stop                                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)                   Cause: Limit value for maximum global axis velocity exceeded                                                   (>>> Page 148)                                                   Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 149)          Cause: Limit value for maximum global axis velocity exceeded                                                   (>>> Page 149)                                                   Solution: Adapt the program in such a way that limit value is not                                                   reached (>>> Page 149)    Cause: Limit value for maximum global axis velocity exceeded  Description               The limit value for the maximum global velocity for rotational axes or the limit                                       value for the maximum global velocity for linear axes defined in the safety con-                                       figuration was exceeded.                                       Possible reasons:                                              An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value                                               other than that specified by the system integrator.                                              The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value to                                               be exceeded.                                       The procedure for checking which values are configured for the maximum                                       global axis velocities is as follows:  Checking instruc-         1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.             tions                             The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                                       2. Select the Axis monitoring tab.                                       3. Check the values of the following parameters:                                                    Maximum velocity rotational axis   148 / 205                                                                   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                  10 Messages        Maximum velocity translational axis   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                    User group “Safety maintenance”                                 Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                  The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                          3. Save safety configuration.  Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                        must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                        bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    Cause: Limit value for maximum global axis velocity exceeded  Description              The limit value for the maximum global velocity for rotational axes or the limit                          value for the maximum global velocity for linear axes defined in the safety con-                          figuration was exceeded.                          Possible reasons:                                 An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value                                  other than that specified by the system integrator.                                 The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value to                                  be exceeded.                          The procedure for checking which values are configured for the maximum                          global axis velocities is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration. tions                            The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Select the Axis monitoring tab.                          3. Check the values of the following parameters:                                       Maximum velocity rotational axis                                       Maximum velocity translational axis   Solution: Adapt the program in such a way that limit value is not reached   10.2.12 KSS15041  Message code                       KSS15041  Message text                       Ackn.: Maximum safe reduced Cartesian velocity exceeded  Message type                       Acknowledgement message    Effect                             Ramp stop                                     Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                            149 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Possible cause(s)                Cause: Limit value for safe reduced Cartesian velocity exceeded                                                (>>> Page 150)                                                Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 150)       Cause: Limit value for safe reduced Cartesian velocity exceeded                                                (>>> Page 150)                                                Solution: Adapt the program in such a way that limit value is not                                                reached (>>> Page 151)    Cause: Limit value for safe reduced Cartesian velocity exceeded  Description               The limit value defined in the global parameters of the safety configuration for                                       the safe reduced Cartesian velocity was exceeded.                                       Possible reasons:                                              An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value                                               other than that specified by the system integrator.                                              The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value to                                               be exceeded.                                       The procedure for checking which value is configured for the parameter Re-                                       duced Cartesian velocity is as follows:  Checking instruc-         1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.             tions                             The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                                       2. Press Global parameters. The global parameters are displayed.                                       3. Search for the parameter and check the value.   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                     User group “Safety maintenance”                                              Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                 1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                               The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                                       2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                                       3. Save safety configuration.  Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                                   must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                                   bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    Cause: Limit value for safe reduced Cartesian velocity exceeded  Description               The limit value defined in the global parameters of the safety configuration for                                       the safe reduced Cartesian velocity was exceeded.                                       Possible reasons:                                              An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value                                               other than that specified by the system integrator.    150 / 205                                                                  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                10 Messages          The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value to                                  be exceeded.                          The procedure for checking which value is configured for the parameter Re-                          duced Cartesian velocity is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration. tions                            The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Press Global parameters. The global parameters are displayed.                          3. Search for the parameter and check the value.   Solution: Adapt the program in such a way that limit value is not reached   10.2.13 KSS15042  Message code                    KSS15042  Message text                    Ackn.: Safe reduced axis velocity exceeded  Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Limit value for safe reduced axis velocity incorrectly configured                                   (>>> Page 151)                                   Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 151)       Cause: Limit value for safe reduced axis velocity exceeded by pro-                                   gramming (>>> Page 152)                                   Solution: Correcting the programming in the SRC file (>>> Page 152)    Cause: Limit value for safe reduced axis velocity incorrectly configured  Description              The limit value defined in the safety configuration for the safe reduced Carte-                          sian velocity was exceeded.                          An incorrect limit value is entered in the safety configuration, e.g. a value other                          than that specified by the system integrator.                          The procedure for checking which value is configured for the safe reduced ve-                          locity is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration. tions                            The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Select the Axis monitoring tab.                          3. Check the value entered for the parameter Reduced velocity.   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                    User group “Safety maintenance”                                 Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                  The safety configuration opens with the General tab.   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          151 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                                       3. Save safety configuration.  Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                                  must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                                  bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    Cause: Limit value for safe reduced axis velocity exceeded by programming  Description               The programmed path or programming method causes the limit value defined                                       in the safety configuration for the safe reduced axis velocity to be exceeded.                                       If an override reduction is activated by $SR_VEL_RED=TRUE, but the robot                                       moves without spline, the axis velocities are not reduced. The override reduc-                                       tion then only has an effect on axis velocities if spline motions are pro-                                       grammed.  Example                   Axis 5 is moved into a singularity position. Axes 4 and 6 are therefore consid-                                       erably accelerated and the safe reduced axis velocity is exceeded.     Fig. 10-1: Wrist axis singularity (α5 position)   Solution: Correcting the programming in the SRC file  Procedure                        Correct the programming in the SRC file  Further information is contained in the documentation for the relevant                                                  software.    10.2.14 KSS15043  Message code                     KSS15043              Message text                     External safe operational stop violated (axis group {Number of axis                                                group})              Message type                     Status message     152 / 205                                                                Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                              10 Messages   Effect                          Short-circuit braking                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.  Follow-up message               KSS15044 (>>> Page 154)   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Value configured for position tolerance too low (>>> Page 153)                                   Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 153)       Cause: Axis group incorrectly configured (>>> Page 153)                                   Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 154)    Cause: Value configured for position tolerance too low  Description              The value configured in the safety configuration for the position tolerance of at                          least one axis in the axis group is too low. The values specified by the system                          builder must be configured.                          The procedure for checking what values are configured is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration. tions                            The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Select the Axis monitoring tab and press Safe operational stop.                                  The Safe operational stop window opens.                          3. For each axis in the axis group, check whether the value entered for Po-                             sition tolerance matches the specified value.   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                    User group “Safety maintenance”                                 Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                  The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                          2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                          3. Save safety configuration.  Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                      must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                      bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    Cause: Axis group incorrectly configured  Description              The axis group is incorrectly configured in the safety configuration, i.e. the                          group contains axes which are not to be monitored here. The axes specified                          by the system builder must be monitored.                          The procedure for checking whether an axis is monitored in the correct                          axis group is as follows:  Checking instruc-        1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration. tions                            The safety configuration opens with the General tab.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        153 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   2. Select the Axis monitoring tab and press Safe operational stop.                                               The Safe operational stop window opens.                                       3. Select the axis that is to be checked from the list.                                               The check mark must be activated in the check box with the number of the                                               axis group in which the axis is to be monitored.   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                     User group “Safety maintenance”                                              Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                 1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                               The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                                       2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                                       3. Save safety configuration.  Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                                   must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                                   bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    10.2.15 KSS15044  Message code                     KSS15044              Message text                     Ackn.: External safe operational stop violated (axis group {Number of                                                axis group})              Message type                     Acknowledgement message    Effect                           Short-circuit braking                                               Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.              Original message                 KSS15043 (>>> Page 152)   Possible cause(s)                Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.                                                (>>> Page 154)                                                Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 154)    Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.  Description               This follow-up message is displayed if the error cause of the original message                                       has been eliminated.   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description               The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                        An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                              All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                               OK.     154 / 205                                                                Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                               10 Messages   10.2.16 KSS15045  Message code                    KSS15045  Message text                    Error at mastering reference switch  Message type                    Status message    Effect                          No braking reaction                                  No interlock of motions or commands  Follow-up message               KSS15046 (>>> Page 158)   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Reference cable X42 - XS Ref not correctly connected                                   (>>> Page 155)                                   Solution: Connect cable correctly (>>> Page 155)       Cause: Reference position taught incorrectly (>>> Page 156)                                   Solution: Reteach reference position and check accuracy                                   (>>> Page 156)       Cause: Reference switch installed incorrectly or moved                                   (>>> Page 156)                                   Solution: Reinstall or realign reference switch (>>> Page 156)       Cause: Reference cable X42 - XS Ref defective (>>> Page 157)                                   Solution: Exchange reference cable X42 - XS Ref (>>> Page 158)    Cause: Reference cable X42 - XS Ref not correctly connected  Description              The reference switch is connected to interface X42 on the robot controller via                          the reference cable.                          The procedure for checking whether the reference cable is correctly con-                          nected is as follows:  Precondition                    The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                                  persons from switching it on again.                                 The power cable is de-energized.                                 Observe the ESD guidelines.  Checking instruc-        1. Check whether the connectors of the cable are connected firmly enough. tions                    2. Check whether pins are bent when connected.   Solution: Connect cable correctly  Precondition                    The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                                  persons from switching it on again.                                 The power cable is de-energized.                                 Observe the ESD guidelines.  Procedure                       Connect cable correctly.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       155 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Cause: Reference position taught incorrectly  Description               The reference position to which the robot moves in the mastering test has                                       been taught incorrectly. This results in single-channel referencing.  Checking instruc-         1. Move to reference position.             tions                     2. Check whether both proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are                                          actuated by the switching surface (actuating plate or tool).   Solution: Reteach reference position and check accuracy  Description               The reference position must be taught in the subprogram that is executed dur-                                       ing the mastering test and in the safety configuration.                                       If the reference switch is actuated by the ferromagnetic part of a tool, the ac-                                       curacy of the newly taught reference position must be checked.  The reference position must be taught and checked in accordance                                               with the procedure described in the operating and assembly instruc-                                               tions.    Cause: Reference switch installed incorrectly or moved  Description               The taught reference position has been addressed correctly. Single-channel                                       mastering occurs because the reference switch has been installed in an incor-                                       rect position or has been moved.  Checking instruc-         1. Move to reference position.             tions                     2. Check whether both proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are                                          actuated by the switching surface (actuating plate or tool).   Solution: Reinstall or realign reference switch  Description               The reference switch must installed or aligned in such a way that both proxim-                                       ity switch surfaces of the reference switch are actuated simultaneously when                                       the robot is in the reference position.     156 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                 10 Messages     Fig. 10-2: Installation position of reference switch on external axis    Cause: Reference cable X42 - XS Ref defective  Description              The reference switch is connected to interface X42 on the robot controller via                          the reference cable.                          The procedure for checking whether the reference cable is defective is                          as follows:  Precondition                 The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                               persons from switching it on again.                              The power cable is de-energized.                              Observe the ESD guidelines.  Inspection               1. Check whether the connectors are correctly connected. Particular atten- instructions                tion must be paid to:                                  Pins pushed in                                  Corrosion                                  Scorched contacts                                  Connector insert pushed back                                  Connector on correct slot                          2. Check whether the cable is mechanically damaged. Causes of squashed                             cables or wires can include the following:                                  Cable straps too tight                                  Clips too tight                                  Trapped when closing a cover                                  Bend radius too tight                          3. Check whether the cable still conducts electricity. Particular attention must                             be paid to:                                  Cross-connection of individual wires                                  Short-circuit of individual wires with the ground conductor                                  Correct wiring in accordance with circuit diagram    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                         157 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Solution: Exchange reference cable X42 - XS Ref  Description               The reference cable must be exchanged.  When routing the cable, avoid mechanical damage and                                                                observe the minimum bending radii.  The following bending radii serve as guide values:  Type of routing                           Bending radius                                           Fixed installation                        Min. 5xØ of cable                                           Installation in cable carrier             Min. 10xØ of cable  Precondition                     The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                                               persons from switching it on again.                                              The power cable is de-energized.                                              Observe the ESD guidelines.  Procedure                 1. Disconnect and remove the defective reference cable.                                       2. Route the new reference cable correctly (in a fixed installation or cable car-                                          rier).                                       3. Connect the reference cable. Connect connector X42 to interface X42 on                                          the robot controller and connector XS Ref to the reference switch.   10.2.17 KSS15046  Message code                     KSS15046              Message text                     Ackn.: Error at mastering reference switch              Message type                     Acknowledgement message    Effect                           No braking reaction                                               No interlock of motions or commands              Original message                 KSS15045 (>>> Page 155)   Possible cause(s)                Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.                                                (>>> Page 158)                                                Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 158)    Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.  Description               This follow-up message is displayed if the error cause of the original message                                       has been eliminated.   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description               The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                        An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                              All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                               OK.     158 / 205                                                                 Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                             10 Messages   10.2.18 KSS15047  Message code                 KSS15047  Message text                 Mastering test required (internal)  Message type                 Status message    Effect                       No braking reaction                               No interlock of motions or commands   10.2.19 KSS15048  Message code                 KSS15048  Message text                 Ackn.: Mastering test time interval expired  Message type                 Acknowledgement message    Effect                       Ramp stop                               Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)            Cause: Monitoring time elapsed (>>> Page 159)                                Solution: Perform mastering test and acknowledge message                                (>>> Page 159)    Cause: Monitoring time elapsed  Description              Following an internal mastering test request, the robot can be moved for an-                          other 2 hours. This time has elapsed.                          It is possible to acknowledge the message without performing a mastering test                          beforehand. The robot can then be moved for another 2 hours without refer-                          enced axes (not recommended).  The safety integrity of the safety functions based upon safe axis po-                                  sitions is limited until the mastering test has been performed and con-                                  firmed. The safety functions may behave differently from how they                           were configured, creating additional hazards in the system.   Solution: Perform mastering test and acknowledge message  Description              Following a successful mastering test, the message can be acknowledged.  Procedure                1. Perform mastering test.                          2. Acknowledge the message with OK.   10.2.20 KSS15049  Message code                 KSS15049  Message text                 Mastering test failed  Message type                 Status message     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                      159 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Effect                       No braking reaction                                           No interlock of motions or commands   Possible cause(s)            Cause: Mastering test failed (>>> Page 160)                                            Solution: Eliminate cause of error and carry out mastering test                                            (>>> Page 160)    Cause: Mastering test failed  Description               The mastering test has failed. The cause of the error is indicated in an addi-                                       tional message.   Solution: Eliminate cause of error and carry out mastering test  Description               The error cause specified in the additional message must be eliminated and                                       the mastering test must then be performed again.   10.2.21 KSS15050  Message code                 KSS15050              Message text                 Reference stop              Message type                 Status message    Effect                       Ramp stop                                           Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)            Cause: Mastering test not yet performed successfully (>>> Page 160)                                            Solution: Perform mastering test in T1 mode (>>> Page 160)    Cause: Mastering test not yet performed successfully  Description               The mastering test has not yet been performed successfully. The reference                                       stop is triggered by an activated monitoring space for which the option Stop if                                       mastering test not yet done is configured.   Solution: Perform mastering test in T1 mode  Description               The mastering test must be performed in T1 mode.   10.2.22 KSS15051  Message code                 KSS15051              Message text                 Ackn.: Mastering test position not reached              Message type                 Acknowledgement message    Effect                       Ramp stop                                           Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.     160 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                              10 Messages     Possible cause(s)               Cause: Mastering test interrupted (>>> Page 161)                                   Solution: Acknowledge message and resume program                                   (>>> Page 161)    Cause: Mastering test interrupted  Description              The mastering test was interrupted before the reference position was reached:                                 Operating mode T1 or T2: The operator released the Start key.                                 AUT EXT mode: The Start signal from the higher-level controller was can-                                  celled.   Solution: Acknowledge message and resume program  Description              The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                1. Acknowledge the message with OK.                          2. Operating mode T1 or T2: Press and hold down the Start key to resume                             the program.                                  AUT EXT mode: Send the Start signal from the higher-level controller to                                  resume the program.   10.2.23 KSS15052  Message code                    KSS15052  Message text                    Ackn.: Mastering reference switch not actuated  Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Reference switch fouled (>>> Page 162)                                   Solution: Clean the reference switch (>>> Page 162)       Cause: Reference switch moved (>>> Page 162)                                   Solution: Realign the reference switch (>>> Page 162)       Cause: Actuating plate bent (>>> Page 162)                                   Solution: Realign the actuating plate (>>> Page 162)       Cause: Referencing with incorrectly mastered robot (>>> Page 162)                                   Solution: Restore the mastering or remaster (>>> Page 162)       Cause: Reference switch defective (>>> Page 163)                                   Solution: Exchange the reference switch (>>> Page 163)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       161 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Cause: Reference switch fouled  Description               The reference switch was not actuated at the reference position because the                                       proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are fouled.   Solution: Clean the reference switch  Procedure                    Clean the proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch.  Do not use aggressive cleaning agents.    Cause: Reference switch moved  Description               The taught reference position has been addressed correctly, but the reference                                       switch not actuated. The reference switch or the device on which the reference                                       switch is installed has been moved.  Checking instruc-         1. Move to reference position.             tions                     2. Check whether both proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are                                          actuated by the switching surface (actuating plate or tool).   Solution: Realign the reference switch  Description               The reference switch must aligned in such a way that both proximity switch                                       surfaces of the reference switch are actuated simultaneously when the robot                                       is in the reference position.   Cause: Actuating plate bent  Description               The taught reference position has been addressed correctly, but the reference                                       switch not actuated. The actuating plate fastened to the robot flange or robot                                       tool was bent.  Checking instruc-         1. Move to reference position.             tions                     2. Check whether both proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are                                          actuated by the actuating plate.   Solution: Realign the actuating plate  Description               The actuating plate must be aligned so that both proximity switch surfaces of                                       the reference switch are actuated simultaneously when the robot is in the ref-                                       erence position.   Cause: Referencing with incorrectly mastered robot  Description               The reference switch was not actuated in the reference position. The refer-                                       ence position was not reached because the current mastering deviates from                                       the one used to teach the reference run.   Solution: Restore the mastering or remaster  Description               Restore the mastering with which the reference run was taught or remaster the                                       robot.    162 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                               10 Messages   Cause: Reference switch defective  Description              The taught reference position has been addressed correctly, but the reference                          switch is defective.   Solution: Exchange the reference switch  Description              The reference switch must be exchanged.  Precondition                    The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                                  persons from switching it on again.                                 The power cable is de-energized.                                 Observe the ESD guidelines.  Procedure                1. Unplug the reference cable.                          2. Unscrew the reference switch.                          3. Screw on the new reference switch.                          4. Plug the reference cable into the new reference switch.                          5. Perform a mastering test in order to check whether all reference groups                             are referenced by the new switch.   10.2.24 KSS15053  Message code                    KSS15053  Message text                    Ackn.: Not all mastering reference groups referenced  Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          Ramp stop                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Reference group not taught (>>> Page 163)                                   Solution: Teach reference group (>>> Page 164)    Cause: Reference group not taught  Description              One of the configured reference groups has not been taught.                          The following points must be taught for each reference group:                                 Motion to the reference switch                                 Reference position  The reference position must additionally be taught in the safety con-                                      figuration.         Motion away from the reference switch                          With KSS, the points are taught in the following file:  File                         Directory           C:\KRC\Roboter\KRC\R1\Program     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        163 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   File                 MasRef_USER.src                                                             The file contains 2 subprograms each for reference                                                             groups 1 … 3.                                                             MASREFSTARTG1() … MASREFSTARTG3()                                                             The motion to the reference switch and the reference                                                             position are taught here.                                                             MASREFBACKG1() … MASREFBACKG3()                                                             The motion away from the reference switch is taught                                                             here.  With VSS, the points are taught in the following file:  File                       Directory            C:\KRC\Roboter\KRC\R1\UPs                                        File                 User-specific subprogram  The procedure for checking which reference groups are configured is as                                       follows:  Checking instruc-         1. Open the safety configuration: For this, select Configuration > Safety             tions                        configuration in the main menu.                                       2. Select the Reference position tab.                                            For each axis, the reference group to which it is assigned is indicated in                                            the Reference group column.                                       It is then possible to check whether the configured reference groups                                       have been taught:  Checking instruc-         1. Select the file in the Navigator and press Open. The file is displayed in the             tions                        editor.                                       2. Check whether the points required for addressing a reference group have                                          been taught.   Solution: Teach reference group  Description               The points required for addressing the reference group must be taught.  This activity must be carried out in accordance with the procedure de-                                                 scribed in the assembly and operating instructions.    10.2.25 KSS15054  Message code                    KSS15054              Message text                    Workspace monitoring functions deactivated (mastering error)              Message type                    Status message    Effect                          No braking reaction                                              No interlock of motions or commands   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Axes unmastered (>>> Page 165)                                               Solution: Master unmastered axes (>>> Page 165)     164 / 205                                                              Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                               10 Messages   Cause: Axes unmastered  Description              At least one axis is unmastered.   Solution: Master unmastered axes  Procedure                       Remaster all unmastered axes.   10.2.26 KSS15065  Message code                    KSS15065  Message text                    Ackn.: Level at mastering reference switch is unexpectedly "low"  Message type                    Acknowledgement message    Effect                          No braking reaction                                  No interlock of motions or commands  Original message                KSS15066 (>>> Page 165)   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.                                   (>>> Page 165)                                   Solution: Acknowledge message (>>> Page 165)    Cause: Error cause of the original message has been eliminated.  Description              This follow-up message is displayed if the error cause of the original message                          has been eliminated.   Solution: Acknowledge message  Description              The program can be resumed once the message has been acknowledged.  Procedure                       An acknowledgeable message can be acknowledged with OK.                                 All acknowledgeable messages can be acknowledged at once with All                                  OK.   10.2.27 KSS15066  Message code                    KSS15066  Message text                    Level at mastering reference switch is unexpectedly "low"  Message type                    Status message    Effect                          No braking reaction                                  No interlock of motions or commands  Follow-up message               KSS15065 (>>> Page 165)   Possible cause(s)               Cause: Reference switch fouled (>>> Page 166)                                   Solution: Clean the reference switch (>>> Page 166)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       165 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2          Cause: Mastering test input incorrectly configured (>>> Page 166)                                                   Solution: Change the safety configuration (>>> Page 166)          Cause: Reference switch installed incorrectly or moved                                                   (>>> Page 167)                                                   Solution: Reinstall or realign reference switch (>>> Page 167)          Cause: Reference switch defective (>>> Page 167)                                                   Solution: Exchange the reference switch (>>> Page 167)    Cause: Reference switch fouled  Description               The reference switch was actuated for at least 5 minutes outside the mastering                                       test because the proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are fouled,                                       e.g. with metal dust or weld spatter.   Solution: Clean the reference switch  Procedure                        Clean the proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch.  Do not use aggressive cleaning agents.    Cause: Mastering test input incorrectly configured  Description               The reference switch for the mastering test can be connected either to the ro-                                       bot controller via interface X42, or to a higher level safety PLC that is linked to                                       the robot controller using an Ethernet safety interface.                                       The mastering test input must be configured accordingly in the safety config-                                       uration.                                       The procedure for checking how the mastering test input is configured                                       is as follows:  Checking instruc-         1. Open the safety configuration: For this, select Configuration > Safety             tions                        configuration in the main menu.                                       2. On the General tab, press Global parameters.                                       3. Check the parameter Mastering test input:                                                    at cabinet = reference switch is connected to the robot controller.                                                    via bus interface = reference switch is connected via Ethernet inter-                                                     face.   Solution: Change the safety configuration  Precondition                     User group “Safety maintenance”                                              Operating mode T1 or T2  Procedure                 1. In the main menu, select Configuration > Safety configuration.                                               The safety configuration opens with the General tab.                                       2. Select the corresponding tab and modify the configuration as required.                                       3. Save safety configuration.     166 / 205                                                                   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                            10 Messages    Following a change to the safety configuration, safety acceptance                                    must be carried out and documented by means of checklists.   Further information on safety acceptance is contained in the assem-                                    bly and operating instructions of the safety option.    Cause: Reference switch installed incorrectly or moved  Description              The reference switch was actuated outside of the mastering test for at least                          5 minutes. The reference switch is installed in the wrong position or has been                          moved.  Checking instruc-        1. Move to reference position. tions                    2. Check whether both proximity switch surfaces of the reference switch are                             actuated by the switching surface (actuating plate or tool).   Solution: Reinstall or realign reference switch  Description              The reference switch must installed or aligned in such a way that both proxim-                          ity switch surfaces of the reference switch are actuated simultaneously when                          the robot is in the reference position.     Fig. 10-3: Installation position of reference switch on external axis    Cause: Reference switch defective  Description              The reference switch was actuated outside of the mastering test for at least                          5 minutes. The reference switch is defective.   Solution: Exchange the reference switch  Description              The reference switch must be exchanged.    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                     167 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Precondition                     The robot controller is switched off and secured to prevent unauthorized                                               persons from switching it on again.                                              The power cable is de-energized.                                              Observe the ESD guidelines.  Procedure                 1. Unplug the reference cable.                                       2. Unscrew the reference switch.                                       3. Screw on the new reference switch.                                       4. Plug the reference cable into the new reference switch.                                       5. Perform a mastering test in order to check whether all reference groups                                          are referenced by the new switch.   10.2.28 KSS15079  Message code                     KSS15079              Message text                     Monitoring space no. {Number of monitoring space} violated              Message type                     Status message    Effect                           No braking reaction                                               No interlock of motions or commands   Possible cause(s)                Cause: Monitoring space violated in T1 or T2 (>>> Page 168)                                                Solution: Move the robot out of the violated space: (>>> Page 168)    Cause: Monitoring space violated in T1 or T2  Description               The monitoring space has been violated in T1 or T2 mode. The active safe                                       tool, or at least one of the robot axes, is no longer situated in the permissible                                       range of the monitoring space.                                       The monitoring space is considered to have been violated if the monitoring                                       was only activated after the robot had moved over the space limit.                                       The permissible range depends on the type of monitoring space:  Space type           Workspace                                      Protected space              Cartesian space      The active safe tool must move                 The active safe tool must move out-                                   within the limits of the monitoring            side the limits of the monitoring                                   space.                                         space.                                   The space is violated if the safe tool         The space is violated if the safe tool                                   leaves the monitoring space.                   enters the monitoring space.              Axis space           The axes must move within the limits           The axes must move outside the lim-                                   of the monitoring space.                       its of the monitoring space.                                   The space is violated if the axes              The space is violated if the axes                                   leave the monitoring space.                    enter the monitoring space.   Solution: Move the robot out of the violated space:  Description               The robot must be moved out of the violated space in T1 mode. No other op-                                       erating mode can be set until the robot has left the violated space.                                       If the space is violated in T1 mode, the acknowledgement message Ackn.:                                       Stop because workspace exceeded is additionally displayed.   168 / 205                                                                Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                10 Messages   Precondition                    Operating mode T1  Procedure                1. When the acknowledgement message is displayed, confirm it with OK.                          2. Press and hold down the enabling switch.                          3. Move the robot out of the violated space:                                       Using the jog keys (manual mode)                                       Using the Start and Start backwards keys (program mode)   10.2.29 KSS15081  Message code                       KSS15081  Message text                       Monitoring space no. {Number of monitoring space} exceeded  Message type                       Status message    Effect                             No braking reaction                                     No interlock of motions or commands   Possible cause(s)                  Cause: Monitoring space exceeded in T1 or T2 (>>> Page 169)                                      Solution: Move the robot out of the violated space: (>>> Page 169)    Cause: Monitoring space exceeded in T1 or T2  Description              The monitoring space has been exceeded in T1 or T2 mode. The active safe                          tool, or at least one of the robot axes, is no longer situated in the permissible                          range of the monitoring space.                          The monitoring space is considered to have been exceeded if the monitoring                          was already activated when the robot moved over the space limit.                          The permissible range depends on the type of monitoring space:  Space type             Workspace                                    Protected space  Cartesian space        The active safe tool must move               The active safe tool must move out-                         within the limits of the monitoring          side the limits of the monitoring                         space.                                       space.                         The space is exceeded if the safe            The space is exceeded if the safe                         tool leaves the monitoring space.            tool enters the monitoring space.  Axis space             The axes must move within the limits         The axes must move outside the lim-                         of the monitoring space.                     its of the monitoring space.                         The space is exceeded if the axes            The space is exceeded if the axes                         leave the monitoring space.                  enter the monitoring space.   Solution: Move the robot out of the violated space:  Description              The robot must be moved out of the violated space in T1 mode. No other op-                          erating mode can be set until the robot has left the violated space.                          If the space is violated in T1 mode, the acknowledgement message Ackn.:                          Stop because workspace exceeded is additionally displayed.  Precondition                    Operating mode T1  Procedure                1. When the acknowledgement message is displayed, confirm it with OK.                          2. Press and hold down the enabling switch.  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        169 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   3. Move the robot out of the violated space:                                                    Using the jog keys (manual mode)                                                    Using the Start and Start backwards keys (program mode)   10.2.30 KSS15083  Message code                        KSS15083              Message text                        Ackn.: Cartesian velocity in monitoring space no. {Number of monitor-                                                   ing space} exceeded              Message type                        Acknowledgement message    Effect                              Ramp stop                                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   10.2.31 KSS15127  Message code                        KSS15127              Message text                        Ackn.: Stop because workspace exceeded              Message type                        Acknowledgement message    Effect                              Ramp stop                                                  Input of active commands (robot motions, program start) is blocked.   Possible cause(s)                   Cause: Monitoring space violated or exceeded in T1 (>>> Page 170)                                                   Solution: Acknowledge the message and move the robot out of the vi-                                                   olated space (>>> Page 170)    Cause: Monitoring space violated or exceeded in T1  Description               The robot has violated or exceeded a monitoring space in T1 mode. A status                                       message additionally indicates the affected space.   Solution: Acknowledge the message and move the robot out of the violated space  Description               The robot must be moved out of the violated space in T1 mode. This is only                                       possible once the message has been acknowledged.  Precondition                     Operating mode T1  Procedure                 1. Acknowledge the message with OK.                                       2. Press and hold down the enabling switch.                                       3. Move the robot out of the violated space:                                                    Using the jog keys (manual mode)                                                    Using the Start and Start backwards keys (program mode)     170 / 205                                                                  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                   11 Appendix   11           Appendix A     11.1         Checklists x     The checklists here serve merely as examples of checklists for safety                                       acceptance. It is permissible to carry out and document safety accep-                                       tance using user-specific checklists.   11.1.1       Precondition for safety acceptance based on the checklists      Mechanical and electrical installation of the industrial robot have been                                  completed.                                 Safety configuration is completed.                                 Safety maintenance technician is trained (training at KUKA Roboter                                  GmbH)  The system integrator is responsible for the design of the cell.                                     The safety maintenance technician uses the values and configura-                                     tions supplied by the system integrator to configure the robot and                              tests whether the safety functions work as specified. The safety maintenance                              technician does not perform a safety assessment of the system.   11.1.2       Checklist for robot and system   The inspection points of this checklist must be completed and con-                                       firmed in writing by the system builder.   Checklist                       Serial number of the robot: ____________________                                 Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                 Name of system builder: ____________________  No.      Inspection point                                                                      OK        1       The industrial robot is in flawless mechanical condition and correctly installed                and fastened in accordance with the assembly or operating instructions of the                robot.        2       The permissible rated payload of the robot has not been exceeded.        3       There are no foreign bodies or loose parts on the industrial robot.        4       All safety equipment required for the system and robot is correctly installed                and operational.        5       The power supply ratings of the industrial robot correspond to the local sup-                ply voltage and mains type, and the machine data correspond to these.        6       The connecting cables are correctly connected and the connectors are                locked.        7       The ground conductor and the equipotential bonding cable are sufficiently                rated and correctly connected.        8       The system meets all the relevant laws, regulations and norms valid for the                installation site.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        171 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Remarks / deviations     Place, date              Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                                       the safety acceptance test.   11.1.3    Checklist for safety functions   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                              firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.   Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ____________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Checksum of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Activation code of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________  No.       Inspection item                                                      OK      Not relevant                 1       Safe monitoring is activated.                 2       Robot is mastered.                 3       The machine data have been checked and are appropriate for                         the robot used.                          (>>> 4.8.3.1 "Checking machine data and safety configura-                         tion" Page 51)                         The machine data loaded must match the machine data on the                         identification plate of the robot.                 4       The machine data of the external axes have been correctly                         entered and checked.                         Checking instructions:                            Move each external axis a defined distance by means of a                             PTP_REL motion, e.g. 90°. Carry out a visual inspection                             and check whether this distance is covered.                            In the case of a KL, move the external axis a defined dis-                             tance by means of a PTP_REL motion, e.g. 500 mm. Carry                             out a visual inspection and additionally monitor the display                             of the Cartesian actual position to check whether this dis-                             tance is covered.                 5       The local and external safety functions have been checked                         and are functioning correctly.                          (>>> 4.8.3 "Start-up and recommissioning" Page 50)    172 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                       11 Appendix   No.      Inspection item                                                   OK   Not relevant    6      The reference position has been taught in the mastering test           program and in the safety configuration.    7      Was the mastering test successful?    8      Was the brake test successful?           Axis A1           Axis A2           Axis A3           Axis A4           Axis A5           Axis A6           External axes    9      Operator safety acknowledgement has been checked and is           functioning correctly.            (>>> 4.5.4 "“Operator safety” signal" Page 42)   10      Peripheral contactor (US2) has been checked and switches at           the right time.           Note: Further information about checking the peripheral con-           tactor is contained in the “Operating and Programming Instruc-           tions for System Integrators”.   11      Have the Cartesian and axis-specific velocities been config-           ured correctly and checked?           The corresponding checklists must be completed and con-           firmed in writing for the Cartesian and axis-specific velocity           monitoring functions.            (>>> 11.1.4 "Checklist for Cartesian velocity monitoring func-           tions" Page 175)            (>>> 11.1.5 "Checklist for axis-specific velocity monitoring           functions" Page 176)   12      Has the correct configuration of the safe operational stop been           checked by moving all axes?           Each axis in an axis group must be tested individually.           The corresponding checklist must be completed and con-           firmed in writing for every axis group.           (>>> 11.1.6 "Checklist for safe operational stop for axis           groups" Page 180)   13      Has the correct configuration of the cell area been checked by           moving to all reachable limits?           The corresponding checklist must be completed and con-           firmed in writing for the cell area.            (>>> 11.1.7 "Checklist for cell area" Page 182)     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                173 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   No.      Inspection item                                                     OK      Not relevant               14      Has the correct configuration of the monitoring spaces used                       been checked by moving to all reachable limits?                       Each space surface of a Cartesian monitoring space must be                       addressed at 3 different points.                       The axis of an axis-specific monitoring space must be moved                       to the upper and lower limits of the space.                       The corresponding checklist must be completed and con-                       firmed in writing for each monitoring space used.                       (>>> 11.1.8 "Checklist for Cartesian monitoring spaces"                       Page 183)                       (>>> 11.1.9 "Checklist for axis-specific monitoring spaces"                       Page 185)                       Monitoring space 1                       Monitoring space 2                       Monitoring space 3                       Monitoring space 4                       Monitoring space 5                       Monitoring space 6                       Monitoring space 7                       Monitoring space 8                       Monitoring space 9                       Monitoring space 10                       Monitoring space 11                       Monitoring space 12                       Monitoring space 13                       Monitoring space 14                       Monitoring space 15                       Monitoring space 16     174 / 205                                                        Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                            11 Appendix   No.       Inspection item                                                    OK     Not relevant  15         Have the safe tools used been configured correctly and             checked?             At least one monitoring space and one velocity must be             checked with each safe tool.             The corresponding checklist must be completed and con-             firmed in writing for each safe tool used.              (>>> 11.1.10 "Checklist for safe tools" Page 190)             Tool 1             Tool 2             Tool 3             Tool 4             Tool 5             Tool 6             Tool 7             Tool 8             Tool 9             Tool 10             Tool 11             Tool 12             Tool 13             Tool 14             Tool 15             Tool 16  16         The safety configuration has been archived.  17         If an existing safety configuration has been changed:             A change log has been created and checked.  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date  Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                          the safety acceptance test.   11.1.4     Checklist for Cartesian velocity monitoring functions   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                    firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                    175 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   The Cartesian velocity monitoring functions cannot be tested against a dis-                                       crete value. It is possible to carry out a test using an exaggerated value in or-                                       der to check whether velocity monitoring is triggered.  Precondition                 Override reduction for the velocity is deactivated: $SR_VEL_RED =                                           FALSE  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ____________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Safe tool used in test: ____________________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________                                       Specified value:                                          Value specified by cell planner, design engineer                                       Configured value:                                          Value entered in the safety configuration  No.       Inspection item                                                      OK        Not relevant                1        The global maximum Cartesian velocity has been correctly                         configured and checked.                         Specified value: __________ mm/s                         Configured value: __________ mm/s                2        The safe reduced Cartesian velocity has been correctly con-                         figured and checked.                         Specified value: __________ mm/s                         Configured value: __________ mm/s                3        The safe reduced Cartesian velocity for T1 has been cor-                         rectly configured and checked.                         Specified value: __________ mm/s                         Configured value: __________ mm/s  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date              Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                                       the safety acceptance test.   11.1.5    Checklist for axis-specific velocity monitoring functions   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                               firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.    176 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                               11 Appendix    The trace function (oscilloscope) can be used to determine the axis                                    velocities.   Precondition                 Override reduction for the velocity is deactivated: $SR_VEL_RED =                               FALSE  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ____________________                              Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                              Time stamp of the safety configuration: ____________________                              Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________                          Specified value:                              Value specified by cell planner, design engineer                          Configured value:                              Value entered in the safety configuration                          Test value:                              Value with which the test was carried out                          1. Checking the global maximum axis velocity  It is only necessary to test the global maximum axis velocity if an axis                                   must not exceed a defined velocity. If the global maximum axis veloc-                                   ity is only to limit the minimum axis-specific protected space, no test                           is required.  No.       Axis name           Inspection item                                OK        Not relevant  The global maximum axis velocity has been correctly entered and  checked using at least one axis.     1                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  2. Checking the reduced axis velocity  No.       Axis name           Inspection item                                OK        Not relevant  The reduced axis velocity has been correctly configured and checked  for each axis.   2.1                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s   2.2                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s   2.3                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s   2.4                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                 Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        177 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   No.     Axis name            Inspection item                                OK        Not relevant              2.5                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.6                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: _________ °/s or mm/s              2.7                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.8                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: ________ °/s or mm/s              2.9                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.10                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.11                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.12                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.13                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: ________ °/s or mm/s              2.14                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.15                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s              2.16                         Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                           Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3. Checking the maximum axis velocity for T1     178 / 205                                                         Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                  11 Appendix    No.      Axis name            Inspection item                          OK   Not relevant The maximum axis velocity for T1 has been correctly configured and checked for each axis.  3.1                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.2                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.3                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.4                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.5                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.6                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: _________ °/s or mm/s  3.7                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.8                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: ________ °/s or mm/s  3.9                           Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.10                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.11                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.12                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  3.13                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                Test value: ________ °/s or mm/s    Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                           179 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   No.       Axis name           Inspection item                                 OK        Not relevant               3.14                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                             Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                             Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s               3.15                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                             Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                             Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s               3.16                          Specified value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                             Configured value: ________ °/s or mm/s                                             Test value: __________ °/s or mm/s  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date              Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                                       the safety acceptance test.   11.1.6    Checklist for safe operational stop for axis groups   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                               firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.   A separate checklist must be completed for each axis group.    Precondition                 Operating mode T1  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ____________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Axis group number: ____________________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________                                       Specified value:                                          Value specified by cell planner, design engineer                                       Configured value:                                          Value entered in the safety configuration     180 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                          11 Appendix    No.    Axis name              Inspection item                                 OK   Not relevant  1                            1st axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  2                            2nd axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  3                            3rd axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  4                            4th axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  5                            5th axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  6                            6th axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  7                            7th axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm  8                            8th axis of the axis group has been correctly                               configured and checked.                               Position tolerance (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Position tolerance (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                   181 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2    Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date              Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                                       the safety acceptance test.   11.1.7    Checklist for cell area   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                               firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.  The accessible surfaces resulting from the configuration must be violated one                                       after the other, each at 2 different points, to demonstrate the correct configu-                                       ration of the cell area.  Precondition                 The monitoring spaces that can be activated by means of safe inputs have                                           been deactivated.                                          Override reduction for monitoring spaces is deactivated:                                           $SR_WORKSPACE_RED = FALSE  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: ________________                                          Safe tool used in test: ________________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________  No.       Inspection item                                                      OK        Not relevant                1        The limit in the Z direction has been configured correctly and                         checked.                         Z min: ____________mm                         Z max: ____________mm                2        Corner 1 has been correctly configured and checked.                         X coordinate: __________ mm                         Y coordinate: __________ mm                3        Corner 2 has been correctly configured and checked.                         X coordinate: __________ mm                         Y coordinate: __________ mm                4        Corner 3 has been correctly configured and checked.                         Y coordinate: __________ mm                         X coordinate: __________ mm     182 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                            11 Appendix   No.      Inspection item                                                   OK       Not relevant     5      Corner 4 has been correctly configured and checked.            Y coordinate: __________ mm            X coordinate: __________ mm     6      Corner 5 has been correctly configured.            X coordinate: __________ mm            Y coordinate: __________ mm     7      Corner 6 has been correctly configured and checked.            Y coordinate: __________ mm            X coordinate: __________ mm     8      Corner 7 has been correctly configured and checked.            X coordinate: __________ mm            Y coordinate: __________ mm     9      Corner 8 has been correctly configured and checked.            Y coordinate: __________ mm            X coordinate: __________ mm    10      Corner 9 has been correctly configured and checked.            X coordinate: __________ mm            Y coordinate: __________ mm    11      Corner 10 has been correctly configured and checked.            X coordinate: __________ mm            Y coordinate: __________ mm  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date  Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                          the safety acceptance test.   11.1.8    Checklist for Cartesian monitoring spaces   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                    firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.   A separate checklist must be completed for each monitoring space.     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                    183 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   The accessible surfaces resulting from the configuration must be violated one                                       after the other, each at 3 different points, to demonstrate the correct configu-                                       ration of the monitoring space.  Precondition                 The monitoring space to be checked is activated.                                          The monitoring spaces that can be activated by means of safe inputs have                                           been deactivated.                                          Override reduction is deactivated:                                              $SR_WORKSPACE_RED = FALSE                                              $SR_VEL_RED = FALSE  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ____________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Monitoring space checked (name, number): __________                                          Type of space (protected space or workspace): ____________________                                          Stop at boundaries (TRUE|FALSE): __________                                          Reference stop (TRUE|FALSE): __________                                          Space-specific velocity __________mm/s                                          Space-specific velocity valid in: __________                                          Safe tool used in test of velocity                                           or space limit: _________________                                          Always active (TRUE|FALSE): __________                                          Reference coordinate system: _____________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________  No.       Inspection item                                                      OK        Not relevant                1        The coordinates of the monitoring space have been correctly                         configured and checked.                         Origin X: __________ mm                         Origin Y: __________ mm                         Origin Z: __________ mm                         Origin A: __________ °                         Origin B: __________ °                         Origin C: __________ °                         Distance to origin XMin: __________ mm                         Distance to origin YMin: __________ mm                         Distance to origin ZMin: __________ mm                         Distance to origin XMax: __________ mm                         Distance to origin YMax: __________ mm                         Distance to origin ZMax: __________ mm  The following preconditions must be met to demonstrate the correct function-                                       ing of the reference stop:                                          Reference stop is active.                                          Mastering test is requested.                                          Monitored monitoring space is activated.  No.       Inspection item                                                      OK        Not relevant                2        The correct functioning of the reference stop has been                         checked.   184 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                               11 Appendix   The following preconditions must be met to demonstrate the correct function-                          ing of the space-specific velocity:                              Space-specific velocity is active.                              The configured limit value of the space-specific velocity is less than the                               limit value of the maximum Cartesian velocity.                              Checked monitoring space is activated.                              Robot exceeds the configured space-specific velocity.                              Override reduction for the velocity is deactivated: $SR_VEL_RED =                               FALSE                          Specified value:                              Value specified by cell planner, design engineer                          Configured value:                              Value entered in the safety configuration  No.      Inspection item                                                     OK       Not relevant     3      The space-specific velocity has been correctly configured            and checked.            Specified value: __________ mm/s            Configured value: __________ mm/s  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date  Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                          the safety acceptance test.   11.1.9    Checklist for axis-specific monitoring spaces   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                    firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.   A separate checklist must be completed for each monitoring space.   The configured limit values must successively be violated to demonstrate the                          correct functioning of the monitoring space.  Precondition                 The monitoring space to be checked is activated.                              The monitoring spaces that can be activated by means of safe inputs have                               been deactivated.                              Override reduction is deactivated:                                  $SR_WORKSPACE_RED = FALSE  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       185 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2      $SR_VEL_RED = FALSE  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: ____________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: ____________________                                          Monitoring space checked (name, number): _________________                                          Type of space (protected space or workspace): ____________________                                          Stop at boundaries (TRUE|FALSE):_________________                                          Reference stop (TRUE|FALSE): _________________                                          Space-specific velocity _________________ mm/s                                          Space-specific velocity valid in: _________________                                          Safe tool used in test of velocity                                           or space limit: _________________                                          Always active (TRUE|FALSE): _________________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________                                       Specified value:                                          Value specified by cell planner, design engineer                                       Configured value:                                          Value entered in the safety configuration                                       Determined value:                                          Value determined during the test  No.    Axis name             Inspection item                                      OK     Not relevant               1                           1st axis of the monitoring space has been                                           correctly configured and checked.                                           Lower limit (specified value):                                           __________ ° or mm                                           Lower limit (configured value):                                           __________ ° or mm                                           Lower limit (determined value):                                           __________ ° or mm                                           Upper limit (specified value):                                           __________ ° or mm                                           Upper limit (configured value):                                           __________ ° or mm                                           Upper limit (determined value):                                           __________ ° or mm     186 / 205                                                             Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                      11 Appendix   No.    Axis name              Inspection item                             OK   Not relevant  2                            2nd axis of the monitoring space has been                               correctly configured and checked.                               Lower limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm  3                            3rd axis of the monitoring space has been                               correctly configured and checked.                               Lower limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm  4                            4th axis of the monitoring space has been                               correctly configured and checked.                               Lower limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                               187 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   No.    Axis name         Inspection item                                      OK     Not relevant              5                       5th axis of the monitoring space has been                                      correctly configured and checked.                                      Lower limit (specified value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Lower limit (configured value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Lower limit (determined value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (specified value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (configured value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (determined value):                                      __________ ° or mm              6                       6th axis of the monitoring space has been                                      correctly configured and checked.                                      Lower limit (specified value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Lower limit (configured value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Lower limit (determined value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (specified value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (configured value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (determined value):                                      __________ ° or mm              7                       7th axis of the monitoring space has been                                      correctly configured and checked.                                      Lower limit (specified value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Lower limit (configured value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Lower limit (determined value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (specified value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (configured value):                                      __________ ° or mm                                      Upper limit (determined value):                                      __________ ° or mm     188 / 205                                                        Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                              11 Appendix   No.      Axis name            Inspection item                                  OK     Not relevant  8                            8th axis of the monitoring space has been                               correctly configured and checked.                               Lower limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Lower limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (specified value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (configured value):                               __________ ° or mm                               Upper limit (determined value):                               __________ ° or mm  The following preconditions must be met to demonstrate the correct function-                         ing of the reference stop:                             Reference stop is active.                             Mastering test is requested.                             Monitored monitoring space is activated.  No.       Inspection item                                                    OK       Not relevant      9     The correct functioning of the reference stop has been            checked.  The following preconditions must be met to demonstrate the correct function-                         ing of the space-specific velocity:                             Space-specific velocity is active.                             The configured limit value of the space-specific velocity is less than the                              limit value of the maximum Cartesian velocity.                             Checked monitoring space is activated.                             Robot exceeds the configured space-specific velocity.                             Override reduction for the velocity is deactivated: $SR_VEL_RED =                              FALSE  No.       Inspection item                                                    OK       Not relevant   10       The space-specific velocity has been correctly configured            and checked.            Specified value: __________ mm/s            Configured value: __________ mm/s  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       189 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Place, date              Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                                       the safety acceptance test.   11.1.10 Checklist for safe tools   The inspection items of this checklist must be completed and con-                                               firmed in writing by the safety maintenance technician.   A separate checklist must be completed for each safe tool.   A monitoring space must be violated by each configured sphere to demon-                                       strate the correct functioning of the safe tool.  Checklist                    Serial number of the robot: _________________                                          Serial number of the robot controller: ____________________                                          Time stamp of the safety configuration: _________________                                          Safe tool checked (name, number): _______________                                          Monitoring space used in sphere test (name, number):                                           ________________                                          Name of safety maintenance technician: ____________________                                       Specified value:                                          Value specified by cell planner, design engineer                                       Configured value:                                          Value entered in the safety configuration  No.       Inspection item                                                     OK        Not relevant                1        Safe TCP of the tool                         The X, Y and Z coordinates of the safe TCP are correctly                         configured and checked.                         TCP X (specified value): __________ mm                         TCP X (configured value): __________ mm                         TCP Y (specified value): __________ mm                         TCP Y (configured value): __________ mm                         TCP Z (specified value): __________ mm                         TCP Z (configured value): __________ mm     190 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                11 Appendix   No.      Inspection item                                             OK   Not relevant    2      1st sphere on tool           The X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center point and           the sphere radius are correctly configured and checked.           X (specified value): __________ mm           X (configured value): __________ mm           Y (specified value): __________ mm           Y (configured value): __________ mm           Z (specified value): __________ mm           Z (configured value): __________ mm           Radius (specified value): __________ mm           Radius (configured value): __________ mm    3      2nd sphere on tool           The X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center point and           the sphere radius are correctly configured and checked.           X (specified value): __________ mm           X (configured value): __________ mm           Y (specified value): __________ mm           Y (configured value): __________ mm           Z (specified value): __________ mm           Z (configured value): __________ mm           Radius (specified value): __________ mm           Radius (configured value): __________ mm    4      3rd sphere on tool           The X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center point and           the sphere radius are correctly configured and checked.           X (specified value): __________ mm           X (configured value): __________ mm           Y (specified value): __________ mm           Y (configured value): __________ mm           Z (specified value): __________ mm           Z (configured value): __________ mm           Radius (specified value): __________ mm           Radius (configured value): __________ mm    5      4th sphere on tool           The X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center point and           the sphere radius are correctly configured and checked.           X (specified value): __________ mm           X (configured value): __________ mm           Y (specified value): __________ mm           Y (configured value): __________ mm           Z (specified value): __________ mm           Z (configured value): __________ mm           Radius (specified value): __________ mm           Radius (configured value): __________ mm   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                         191 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   No.     Inspection item                                                      OK        Not relevant                6      5th sphere on tool                       The X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center point and                       the sphere radius are correctly configured and checked.                       X (specified value): __________ mm                       X (configured value): __________ mm                       Y (specified value): __________ mm                       Y (configured value): __________ mm                       Z (specified value): __________ mm                       Z (configured value): __________ mm                       Radius (specified value): __________ mm                       Radius (configured value): __________ mm                7      6th sphere on tool                       The X, Y and Z coordinates of the sphere center point and                       the sphere radius are correctly configured and checked.                       X (specified value): __________ mm                       X (configured value): __________ mm                       Y (specified value): __________ mm                       Y (configured value): __________ mm                       Z (specified value): __________ mm                       Z (configured value): __________ mm                       Radius (specified value): __________ mm                       Radius (configured value): __________ mm  Remarks / deviations     : Must be checked by system integrator  Place, date              Signature  By signing, the signatory confirms the correct and complete performance of                                       the safety acceptance test.   11.2      Applied norms and directives  The safety functions of KUKA.SafeOperation meet the requirements of Cate-                                       gory 3 and Performance Level d in accordance with EN ISO 13849-1:2008.     192 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                12 KUKA Service   12 2              KUKA Service A     12.1         Requesting support v     Introduction                This documentation provides information on operation and operator control,                             and provides assistance with troubleshooting. For further assistance, please                             contact your local KUKA subsidiary.  Information                 The following information is required for processing a support request:                                 Description of the problem, including information about the duration and                                  frequency of the fault                                 As comprehensive information as possible about the hardware and soft-                                  ware components of the overall system                                  The following list gives an indication of the information which is relevant in                                  many cases:                                     Model and serial number of the kinematic system, e.g. the manipulator                                     Model and serial number of the controller                                     Model and serial number of the energy supply system                                     Designation and version of the system software                                     Designations and versions of other software components or modifica-                                      tions                                     Diagnostic package KRCDiag                                      Additionally for KUKA Sunrise: Existing projects including applications                                      For versions of KUKA System Software older than V8: Archive of the                                      software (KRCDiag is not yet available here.)                                     Application used                                     External axes used   12.2         KUKA Customer Support  Availability                KUKA Customer Support is available in many countries. Please do not hesi-                             tate to contact us if you have any questions.   Argentina                   Ruben Costantini S.A. (Agency)                             Luis Angel Huergo 13 20                             Parque Industrial                             2400 San Francisco (CBA)                             Argentina                             Tel. +54 3564 421033                             Fax +54 3564 428877                             
[email protected]   Australia                   KUKA Robotics Australia Pty Ltd                             45 Fennell Street                             Port Melbourne VIC 3207                             Australia                             Tel. +61 3 9939 9656                             
[email protected]                             www.kuka-robotics.com.au     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                          193 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Belgium                   KUKA Automatisering + Robots N.V.                                       Centrum Zuid 1031                                       3530 Houthalen                                       Belgium                                       Tel. +32 11 516160                                       Fax +32 11 526794                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka.be   Brazil                    KUKA Roboter do Brasil Ltda.                                       Travessa Claudio Armando, nº 171                                       Bloco 5 - Galpões 51/52                                       Bairro Assunção                                       CEP 09861-7630 São Bernardo do Campo - SP                                       Brazil                                       Tel. +55 11 4942-8299                                       Fax +55 11 2201-7883                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka-roboter.com.br   Chile                     Robotec S.A. (Agency)                                       Santiago de Chile                                       Chile                                       Tel. +56 2 331-5951                                       Fax +56 2 331-5952                                       
[email protected]                                       www.robotec.cl   China                     KUKA Robotics China Co., Ltd.                                       No. 889 Kungang Road                                       Xiaokunshan Town                                       Songjiang District                                       201614 Shanghai                                       P. R. China                                       Tel. +86 21 5707 2688                                       Fax +86 21 5707 2603                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka-robotics.com   Germany                   KUKA Roboter GmbH                                       Zugspitzstr. 140                                       86165 Augsburg                                       Germany                                       Tel. +49 821 797-1926                                       Fax +49 821 797-41 1926                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka-roboter.de     194 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                             12 KUKA Service   France                   KUKA Automatisme + Robotique SAS                          Techvallée                          6, Avenue du Parc                          91140 Villebon S/Yvette                          France                          Tel. +33 1 6931660-0                          Fax +33 1 6931660-1                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka.fr   India                    KUKA Robotics India Pvt. Ltd.                          Office Number-7, German Centre,                          Level 12, Building No. - 9B                          DLF Cyber City Phase III                          122 002 Gurgaon                          Haryana                          India                          Tel. +91 124 4635774                          Fax +91 124 4635773                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka.in   Italy                    KUKA Roboter Italia S.p.A.                          Via Pavia 9/a - int.6                          10098 Rivoli (TO)                          Italy                          Tel. +39 011 959-5013                          Fax +39 011 959-5141                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka.it   Japan                    KUKA Robotics Japan K.K.                          YBP Technical Center                          134 Godo-cho, Hodogaya-ku                          Yokohama, Kanagawa                          240 0005                          Japan                          Tel. +81 45 744 7691                          Fax +81 45 744 7696                          
[email protected]   Canada                   KUKA Robotics Canada Ltd.                          6710 Maritz Drive - Unit 4                          Mississauga                          L5W 0A1                          Ontario                          Canada                          Tel. +1 905 670-8600                          Fax +1 905 670-8604                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka-robotics.com/canada   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                         195 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Korea                     KUKA Robotics Korea Co. Ltd.                                       RIT Center 306, Gyeonggi Technopark                                       1271-11 Sa 3-dong, Sangnok-gu                                       Ansan City, Gyeonggi Do                                       426-901                                       Korea                                       Tel. +82 31 501-1451                                       Fax +82 31 501-1461                                       
[email protected]   Malaysia                  KUKA Robot Automation (M) Sdn Bhd                                       South East Asia Regional Office                                       No. 7, Jalan TPP 6/6                                       Taman Perindustrian Puchong                                       47100 Puchong                                       Selangor                                       Malaysia                                       Tel. +60 (03) 8063-1792                                       Fax +60 (03) 8060-7386                                       
[email protected]   Mexico                    KUKA de México S. de R.L. de C.V.                                       Progreso #8                                       Col. Centro Industrial Puente de Vigas                                       Tlalnepantla de Baz                                       54020 Estado de México                                       Mexico                                       Tel. +52 55 5203-8407                                       Fax +52 55 5203-8148                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka-robotics.com/mexico   Norway                    KUKA Sveiseanlegg + Roboter                                       Sentrumsvegen 5                                       2867 Hov                                       Norway                                       Tel. +47 61 18 91 30                                       Fax +47 61 18 62 00                                       
[email protected]   Austria                   KUKA Roboter CEE GmbH                                       Gruberstraße 2-4                                       4020 Linz                                       Austria                                       Tel. +43 7 32 78 47 52                                       Fax +43 7 32 79 38 80                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka.at     196 / 205                                                           Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                    12 KUKA Service   Poland                   KUKA Roboter Austria GmbH                          Spółka z ograniczoną odpowiedzialnością                          Oddział w Polsce                          Ul. Porcelanowa 10                          40-246 Katowice                          Poland                          Tel. +48 327 30 32 13 or -14                          Fax +48 327 30 32 26                          
[email protected]    Portugal                 KUKA Robots IBÉRICA, S.A.                          Rua do Alto da Guerra n° 50                          Armazém 04                          2910 011 Setúbal                          Portugal                          Tel. +351 265 729 780                          Fax +351 265 729 782                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka.com   Russia                   KUKA Robotics RUS                          Werbnaja ul. 8A                          107143 Moskau                          Russia                          Tel. +7 495 781-31-20                          Fax +7 495 781-31-19                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka-robotics.ru   Sweden                   KUKA Svetsanläggningar + Robotar AB                          A. Odhners gata 15                          421 30 Västra Frölunda                          Sweden                          Tel. +46 31 7266-200                          Fax +46 31 7266-201                          
[email protected]   Switzerland              KUKA Roboter Schweiz AG                          Industriestr. 9                          5432 Neuenhof                          Switzerland                          Tel. +41 44 74490-90                          Fax +41 44 74490-91                          
[email protected]                          www.kuka-roboter.ch     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                197 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Spain                     KUKA Robots IBÉRICA, S.A.                                       Pol. Industrial                                       Torrent de la Pastera                                       Carrer del Bages s/n                                       08800 Vilanova i la Geltrú (Barcelona)                                       Spain                                       Tel. +34 93 8142-353                                       Fax +34 93 8142-950                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka.es   South Africa              Jendamark Automation LTD (Agency)                                       76a York Road                                       North End                                       6000 Port Elizabeth                                       South Africa                                       Tel. +27 41 391 4700                                       Fax +27 41 373 3869                                       www.jendamark.co.za   Taiwan                    KUKA Robot Automation Taiwan Co., Ltd.                                       No. 249 Pujong Road                                       Jungli City, Taoyuan County 320                                       Taiwan, R. O. C.                                       Tel. +886 3 4331988                                       Fax +886 3 4331948                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka.com.tw   Thailand                  KUKA Robot Automation (M)SdnBhd                                       Thailand Office                                       c/o Maccall System Co. Ltd.                                       49/9-10 Soi Kingkaew 30 Kingkaew Road                                       Tt. Rachatheva, A. Bangpli                                       Samutprakarn                                       10540 Thailand                                       Tel. +66 2 7502737                                       Fax +66 2 6612355                                       
[email protected]                                       www.kuka-roboter.de   Czech Republic            KUKA Roboter Austria GmbH                                       Organisation Tschechien und Slowakei                                       Sezemická 2757/2                                       193 00 Praha                                       Horní Počernice                                       Czech Republic                                       Tel. +420 22 62 12 27 2                                       Fax +420 22 62 12 27 0                                       
[email protected]    198 / 205                                                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        12 KUKA Service   Hungary                 KUKA Robotics Hungaria Kft.                         Fö út 140                         2335 Taksony                         Hungary                         Tel. +36 24 501609                         Fax +36 24 477031                         
[email protected]   USA                     KUKA Robotics Corporation                         51870 Shelby Parkway                         Shelby Township                         48315-1787                         Michigan                         USA                         Tel. +1 866 873-5852                         Fax +1 866 329-5852                         
[email protected]                         www.kukarobotics.com   UK                      KUKA Robotics UK Ltd                         Great Western Street                         Wednesbury West Midlands                         WS10 7LL                         UK                         Tel. +44 121 505 9970                         Fax +44 121 505 6589                         
[email protected]                         www.kuka-robotics.co.uk     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                     199 / 205             KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     200 / 205                            Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                     Index   Index Symbols                                                 Axis velocity, maximum in T1 27, 89, 119 $BRAKES_OK 109                                          Axis velocity, reduced 27, 89, 119 $BRAKETEST_MONTIME 109                                  Axis-specific monitoring spaces, defining 84 $BRAKETEST_REQ_EX 109                                   Axis-specific monitoring spaces, testing 121 $BRAKETEST_REQ_INT 109                                  Axis-specific protected spaces 23 $BRAKETEST_WARN 109                                     Axis-specific velocity limits, testing 119 $BRAKETEST_WORK 109                                     Axis-specific velocity monitoring, defining 87 $MASTERINGTEST_ACTIVE 100                               Axis-specific workspaces 22 $MASTERINGTEST_GROUP 100 $MASTERINGTEST_REQ_EXT 100                              B $MASTERINGTEST_REQ_INT 100                              BASE coordinate system 16 $MASTERINGTEST_SWITCH_OK 100                            Brake defect 49 $ROBROOT, special cases 18                              Brake release device 47 $SR_ACTIVETOOL 139                                      Brake test 14, 65, 106 $SR_AXISSPEED_OK 139                                    Brake test cycle time 106 $SR_CARTSPEED_OK 139                                    Brake test, function test 113 $SR_DRIVES_ENABLE 139                                   Brake test, programs 107 $SR_MOVE_ENABLE 139                                     Brake test, signals 108, 110 $SR_OV_RED 114, 117                                     Brake test, teaching positions 111 $SR_RANGE_ACTIVE 139                                    Brake, defective 112 $SR_RANGE_OK 139                                        BrakeTestBack.SRC 108, 111 $SR_SAFEMON_ACTIVE 139                                  BrakeTestPark.SRC 108, 111 $SR_SAFEOPSTOP_ACTIVE 140                               BrakeTestReq.SRC 108, 112 $SR_SAFEOPSTOP_OK 140                                   BrakeTestSelfTest.SRC 108, 113 $SR_SAFEREDSPEED_ACTIVE 140                             BrakeTestStart.SRC 108, 111 $SR_VEL_RED 114, 117, 118                               Braking distance 10, 36 $SR_WORKSPACE_RED 114, 117, 118                         Braking time 89                                                         Buttons, overview 63 Numbers 2006/42/EC 58                                           C 2014/30/EU 58                                           Cable lengths, reference switch module 28 2014/68/EC 58                                           Cartesian monitoring spaces, defining 79 95/16/EC 58                                             Cartesian monitoring spaces, testing 120 97/23/EC 58                                             Cartesian protected spaces 21                                                         Cartesian velocity limits, testing 119 A                                                       Cartesian velocity, maximum 76, 119 Accessories 35                                          Cartesian velocity, reduced 77, 119 Activating a new safety configuration 122               Cartesian velocity, reduced for T1 77, 119 Activation code, safety configuration 64                Cartesian workspaces 20 Activation, monitoring space 80, 85                     CE mark 36 Activation, reference stop 81, 86                       Cell area 12, 15, 19, 20 Actuating plate, hole pattern 33                        Cell area, defining 77 Actuating plate, installation 101                       Change log 65 Alarm space 10                                          Checking the reference position 105 Ambient temperature, reference switch 31                Checklists 171 ANSI/RIA R.15.06-2012 58                                Checksum, brake test configuration 65 Appendix 171                                            Checksum, safety configuration 64 Applied norms and regulations 57                        CIP Safety 10, 14, 61 Areas of application 13                                 Circuit diagram, reference switch 33 Automatic mode 55                                       CK 10, 13 Axis angle, lower limit 87                              Cleaning work 55 Axis angle, upper limit 87                              Compatibility 61 Axis limit 10, 22, 23                                   Components 14 Axis range 10, 22, 23, 36                               Configuration 69 Axis range limitation 46                                Configuration, overview 70 Axis range monitoring 46                                Connecting cables 35 Axis velocity, maximum 27, 89                           Connecting cables, overview 29 Axis velocity, maximum global 119                       Connecting, reference switch 102   Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                       201 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Connector pin assignment, reference cable X42-     Hole pattern, actuating plate 33             XS Ref 32                                          Hole pattern, reference switch 32             Coordinate systems 16                              Hysteresis, reference switch 31             Coordinate systems, angles 17             Coordinate systems, orientation 17                 I             Counterbalancing system 56                         I/Os, interface X13 136                                                                Industrial robot 35             D                                                  Installation 61             Danger zone 10, 37                                 Intended use 35             Declaration of conformity 36                       Interface, X13 136             Declaration of incorporation 35, 36                Interface, X13 14             Decommissioning 56                                 Interfaces 125             Diagnosis 139                                      Introduction 9             Diagnostic monitor (menu item) 139             Diagnostic signals via Ethernet interface 133      J             Directives 192                                     Jog mode 45, 48             Discrete safety interface, for safety options 14             Displaying machine data 65                         K             Displaying, change log 65                          KL 10             Disposal 56                                        Knowledge, required 9             Documentation, industrial robot 9                  KUKA Customer Support 193                                                                KUKA smartPAD 37             E             EC declaration of conformity 36                    L             Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 59             Labeling 47             EMC conformity, reference switch 31                Liability 35             EMC Directive 36, 58                               Linear unit 35             EMERGENCY STOP device 43, 44, 48                   Low Voltage Directive 36             EMERGENCY STOP, external 44, 51             EMERGENCY STOP, local 51                           M             EN 60204-1 + A1 59                                 Machine data 51, 64, 65             EN 61000-6-2 59                                    Machinery Directive 36, 58             EN 61000-6-4 + A1 59                               Maintenance 55             EN 614-1 + A1 58                                   Manipulator 35, 37             EN ISO 10218-1 58                                  Manual mode 54             EN ISO 12100 58                                    Mastering position, reference position 97             EN ISO 13849-1 58                                  Mastering test 10, 98             EN ISO 13849-2 58                                  Mastering test input 76             EN ISO 13850 58                                    Mastering test, performing manually 105             Enabling device 44, 48                             Mastering test, programs 99             Enabling device, external 45                       Mastering test, teaching positions 103             Enabling switches 44                               Mastering test, variables 100             Ethernet interface 10, 11, 133                     Mechanical axis range limitation 46             EtherNet/IP 10, 14, 61                             Mechanical end stops 46             Extended SIB 14                                    Messages 141             External axes 35, 38                               Monitoring space 12                                                                Monitoring space, axis-specific 84             F                                                  Monitoring space, Cartesian 79             Faults 49                                          Monitoring spaces 14             FLANGE coordinate system 17                        Monitoring time 10, 98             Function test 50                                   Monitoring, physical safeguards 42             Functional principle 13                            Monitoring, velocity 45             Functions, SafeOperation 13                                                                N             G                                                  Norms 192             General safety measures 48             Global parameters, defining 75                     O                                                                Operating current, reference switch 31             H                                                  Operating voltage, reference switch 31             Hardware 14, 61                                    Operation 63             Hazardous substances 56                            Operator 39  202 / 205                                                        Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                                                                  Index   Operator safety 40, 42, 48                              S Options 35                                              Safe I/Os, displaying 139 Outputs, reference switch 31                            Safe monitoring 76 Overload 49                                             Safe monitoring, activating 75 Override reduction 113                                  Safe monitoring, deactivating 123 Override reduction, spline 115                          Safe operational stop 12, 28, 37, 45 Override reduction, variables 117                       Safe operational stop, axis group 1 to 6 93 Overview, buttons 63                                    Safe operational stop, defining 91 Overview, SafeOperation 13                              Safe operational stop, testing 122 Overview, safety acceptance 117                         Safe robot retraction 68                                                         Safe TCP 26 P                                                       Safe tools 12, 26 Panic position 44                                       Safe tools, defining 93 Performance Level 40                                    Safeguards, external 47 Performing a manual brake test 112                      SafeOperation via Ethernet safety interface 129 Peripheral contactor 53                                 SafeOperation, overview 13 Permissible load current, reference switch 31           Safety 35 Permissible switching distance, reference switch        Safety acceptance, overview 117 31                                                      Safety acceptance, precondition 171 Permissible switching frequency, reference swit-        Safety configuration, displaying information 64 ch 31                                                   Safety configuration, export 67 Personnel 38                                            Safety configuration, import 65 Plant integrator 38                                     Safety configuration, new, activating 122 Polygon, convex 10, 15, 19                              Safety configuration, opening 63 Position tolerance 93                                   Safety configuration, saving 97 Positioner 35                                           Safety controller 41 Pressure Equipment Directive 56, 58                     Safety functions 40, 48 Preventive maintenance work 55                          Safety functions, Ethernet safety interface 125 Product description 13                                  Safety functions, overview 40 PROFINET 11, 14, 61                                     Safety functions, test 118 PROFIsafe 11, 14, 61                                    Safety instructions 9, 69 Protected space 11, 15, 21, 23                          Safety of machinery 58, 59 Protection rating 31                                    Safety options 37 Protective equipment 45                                 Safety STOP 0 11, 37 Pulse duration, reference switch 31                     Safety STOP 1 11, 37 Pulse duty factor, reference switch 31                  Safety STOP 2 12, 37                                                         Safety STOP 0 37 R                                                       Safety STOP 1 37 Radius, tool sphere 72                                  Safety STOP 2 37 Reaction distance 10, 36                                Safety stop, external 45 Recommissioning 50                                      Safety zone 37, 39 Reference cable X42-XS Ref, connector pin as-           Safety, general 35 signment 32                                             Selecting the operating mode 40, 41 Reference group 11, 97, 98                              Serial number, robot 64 Reference position 11, 98                               Service life 31, 37 Reference position, axis angle 97                       Service, KUKA Roboter GmbH 193 Reference position, Cartesian 97                        SIB 11 Reference position, defining 95                         Signals, brake test 108 Reference position, selecting 101                       Signals,brake test 110 Reference stop 11, 25                                   Simulation 54 Reference switch 11                                     Single point of control 56 Reference switch module 28                              smartPAD 37, 49 Reference switch, connecting 102                        Software 14, 35, 61 Reference switch, installation 101                      Software limit switches 46, 48 Reference switch, technical data 31                     Space dimensions 82 Reference system 78, 82                                 Space type 80, 85 Release device 47                                       Space-specific velocity 25, 80, 81, 85, 86 Repair 55                                               Special cases, $ROBROOT 18 Robot controller 35                                     Sphere, radius 72 ROBROOT coordinate system 16                            Spline, override reduction 115                                                         SPOC 56  Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                     203 / 205              KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2   Standstill monitoring 28, 93              X             Start-up 50, 69                           XML export 67             Start-up mode 53, 69                      XML import 65             Start-up, overview 70             STOP 0 36, 38             STOP 1 36, 38             STOP 2 36, 38             Stop at boundaries 80, 85             Stop category 0 38             Stop category 1 38             Stop category 2 38             Stop reactions 16, 27, 40             Stopping distance 10, 15, 36, 39             Storage 56             Support request 193             Switching function, reference switch 31             System integrator 36, 38, 39             System requirements 61             System variables 100, 117, 139  T             T1 38             T2 38             Target group 9             Teach pendant 35             Technical data 31             Technical data, reference switch 31             Terms used 10             Terms used, safety 36             Time stamp, machine data 64             Time stamp, safety configuration 64             TOOL coordinate system 16             Tool sphere, radius 72             Training 9             Transportation 50             Turn-tilt table 35             Type of monitoring space 80, 85  U             Uninstallation, SafeOperation 62             Update, SafeOperation 61             US2 53             Use, contrary to intended use 35             Use, improper 35             User 37, 38             User groups 63  V             Velocity monitoring 45             Velocity monitoring functions 27             Velocity monitoring, axis-specific 87             Velocity, space-specific 25             Version, safety configuration 64             Version, safety option 64  W             Warnings 9             Working range limitation 46             Workspace 10, 15, 20, 22, 36, 39             WORLD coordinate system 16   204 / 205                                               Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                                                        KUKA.SafeOperation 3.2     Issued: 08.06.2016 Version: KST SafeOperation 3.2 V7                            205 / 205